WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also
include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual
and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-833-667-4825 (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................8
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................................16
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................93
4STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................115
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................187
6SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................227
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................275
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................293
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................350
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................356
11INDEX..............................................................................................................................................361
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
KNOW & GO
b
................................................................... 9
SYMBOLS KEY.....................................................................10
ROLLOVER WARNING .......................................................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......................10
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY ........................................................11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................16
Key Fob........................................................................ 16
SENTRY KEY .......................................................................20
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................20
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 20
REMOTE START ...................................................................22
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 22
To Exit Remote Start Mode ....................................... 22
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 23
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.......... 23
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 23
Remote Start Abort Message ..................................... 23
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................23
To Arm The System ..................................................... 24
To Disarm The System................................................ 24
Rearming Of The System............................................ 24
Security System Manual Override.............................. 24
Tamper Alert................................................................ 24
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED........................................................................25
To Arm The System ..................................................... 25
To Disarm The System................................................ 25
Security System Manual Override.............................. 26
DOORS ................................................................................26
Manual Door Locks......................................................26
Power Door Locks .......................................................27
Power Side Steps — If Equipped.................................27
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ......................27
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit .................................29
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .........................29
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors ....29
STEERING WHEEL...............................................................30
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................30
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................................30
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY SETTINGS —
IF EQUIPPED........................................................................31
Programming The Memory Feature............................32
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory.........32
Memory Position Recall...............................................32
SEATS ..................................................................................33
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................33
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped ........37
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped..........40
Power Seat Massage — If Equipped ...........................41
Heated Seats — If Equipped .......................................42
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped...................................43
Head Restraints...........................................................43
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED ..........................................................47
Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................47
Basic Voice Commands...............................................47
Get Started...................................................................47
Additional Information.................................................48
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS .........................................48
MIRRORS ............................................................................ 49
Inside Rearview Mirror................................................ 49
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................................... 49
Outside Mirrors ........................................................... 50
Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.................................................... 50
Conversation Mirror .................................................... 50
Power Mirrors ............................................................. 51
Automatic Power Folding
Mirrors — If Equipped.................................................. 51
Heated Mirrors ............................................................ 52
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse ....................................... 52
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
b
.............................................................. 52
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®............ 52
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 53
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device............................................. 53
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ......................................................................... 53
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device .......................................................................... 54
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 54
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 54
Security ........................................................................ 55
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 55
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS...............................................................55
Headlight Switch ........................................................ 55
Multifunction Lever..................................................... 56
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ................................. 56
High/Low Beam Switch .............................................. 57
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped ....................... 57
Flash-To-Pass .............................................................. 57
Automatic Headlights ................................................ 57
Parking Lights And Panel Lights................................. 57
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers................. 57
Headlight Illumination On Approach.......................... 57
Headlight Delay........................................................... 58
Lights-On Reminder .................................................... 58
Fog Lights .................................................................... 58
Turn Signals................................................................. 59
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 59
Battery Saver............................................................... 59
INTERIOR LIGHTS................................................................59
Courtesy Lights............................................................ 59
Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ................................. 60
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...........................61
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 61
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......................... 62
Rear Wiper And Washer ............................................ 62
Windshield Wiper De-Icer —
If Equipped .................................................................. 62
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..........................................................62
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions..................................................................... 63
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)....................... 69
Climate Voice Recognition.......................................... 69
Operating Tips ............................................................ 69
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............................71
Storage .........................................................................71
Center Console Cooler — If Equipped.........................73
Center Console Safe — If Equipped
b
.....................73
Sun Screens — If Equipped .........................................74
USB/AUX Control ........................................................74
Electrical Power Outlets ..............................................76
Power Inverter .............................................................78
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped.........................78
WINDOWS ..........................................................................79
Power Window Controls...............................................79
Wind Buffeting ............................................................80
Radio Signal Devices On Windshield —
If Equipped...................................................................80
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED...................................81
Tri-Pane Power Sunroof...............................................81
HOOD ...................................................................................83
Opening The Hood .......................................................83
Closing The Hood.........................................................83
LIFTGATE.............................................................................. 83
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ......................................83
To Lock/Close The Liftgate .........................................84
Adjustable Power Liftgate Height ...............................84
Hands-Free Liftgate ....................................................85
Cargo Area Features ...................................................86
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ...........................88
Installing The Crossbars..............................................89
Removing The Crossbars ............................................91
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..........................................93
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
b
......................... 94
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................................. 95
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ................................ 96
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY..................................... 96
Location And Controls ................................................. 96
Engine Oil Life Reset
b
............................................ 98
Display And Messages................................................ 99
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .................100
Head Up Display (HUD) — If Equipped
b
..............103
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions (If Equipped) .....104
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..............................105
Red Warning Lights...................................................105
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................................107
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................................110
Green Indicator Lights...............................................111
White Indicator Lights ...............................................112
Blue Indicator Lights .................................................112
Gray Indicator Lights .................................................112
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II...................113
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ...............................................113
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.......................................................................113
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ................................................... 115
Automatic Transmission ........................................... 115
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition ..............................115
Normal Starting......................................................... 115
AutoPark .................................................................... 116
Extended Park Starting............................................. 117
If Engine Fails To Start.............................................. 117
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ........................................ 118
After Starting ............................................................. 118
Turbocharger “Cool Down” —
3.0L Engine Only....................................................... 118
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 118
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ..................... 118
PARKING BRAKE ............................................................. 118
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ......................................... 118
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION.......................................... 121
Ignition Park Interlock...............................................122
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ...................................................................... 122
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ........................... 122
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION.................................. 125
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped........................................125
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped........................................125
Shift Positions ........................................................... 126
Shifting Procedures .................................................. 126
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped ..................... 126
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED ................................... 127
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection .................................. 127
Instrument Cluster Display Messages..................... 127
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED ........................................ 127
Description................................................................ 127
Air Suspension Modes.............................................. 129
Instrument Cluster Display Messages .................... 129
Operation................................................................... 129
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 130
POWER STEERING........................................................... 130
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......................... 131
Autostop Mode.......................................................... 131
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .................................................................... 131
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode ......... 131
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System......... 132
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System ......... 132
System Malfunction.................................................. 132
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ............. 132
Cruise Control .......................................................... 132
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).................................. 134
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 141
Activation/Deactivation............................................ 141
Traffic Sign Assist Modes ......................................... 141
Indications On The Display....................................... 142
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 143
Operation................................................................... 143
Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off ................... 143
Indications On The Display....................................... 145
System Status........................................................... 145
System Operation/Limitations................................. 145
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM ... 146
ParkSense Sensors .................................................. 147
ParkSense Display.................................................... 147
ParkSense Warning Display......................................150
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........................150
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System ............150
Cleaning The ParkSense System .............................151
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....................151
Side Distance Warning System —
If Equipped.................................................................151
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................................................153
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System.............................................................154
ParkSense Automated Parking —
If Equipped.................................................................155
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist —
If Equipped.................................................................157
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED......................................................................160
Active Lane Management Operation .......................160
Turning Active Lane Management On Or Off...........161
Active Lane Management Warning Message..........161
Changing Active Lane Management Status ............162
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...........................163
Zoom View .................................................................164
Viewing At Speed.......................................................164
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................164
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .......164
Detection Range........................................................166
Service The Night Vision System..............................166
Night Vision System Limitations...............................167
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED......................................................................167
Zoom View .................................................................169
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...............................................169
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
VEHICLE LOADING ........................................................... 170
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ..................... 170
Payload ...................................................................... 170
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)............................ 170
Tire Size ..................................................................... 170
Rim Size..................................................................... 170
Inflation Pressure...................................................... 170
Curb Weight............................................................... 170
Loading ...................................................................... 170
TRAILER TOWING............................................................. 171
Common Towing Definitions .................................... 171
Trailer Hitch Classification........................................174
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)...................................................................... 174
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped ................................................................ 176
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...................................... 176
Towing Requirements ..............................................176
Towing Tips ............................................................... 180
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) .... 181
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle .......... 181
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models ... 181
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive
Models .......................................................................182
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/Quadra–
Drive II Four-Wheel Drive Models............................. 182
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 184
On-Road Driving Tips ................................................ 184
Off-Road Driving Tips ................................................ 184
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................................................... 187
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 187
UCONNECT SETTINGS .................................................... 187
Customer Programmable Features ......................... 188
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......................... 210
Radio Operation........................................................ 210
Media Mode .............................................................. 210
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 210
Passenger Screen Permissions ............................... 211
Home Screen ............................................................ 211
Audio And Video........................................................ 212
Rear Seat Entertainment with Amazon Fire TV
Built-in — If Equipped................................................ 213
HDMI Projecting........................................................ 213
Device Manager........................................................ 213
Navigation ................................................................. 214
Camera...................................................................... 214
3RD PARTY APPS — IF EQUIPPED ................................ 214
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH AMAZON
FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED................................... 216
Overview.................................................................... 216
Getting Started.......................................................... 216
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in from the Front Radio Screen....................... 217
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in from the Rear Screens................................. 217
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in from the Passenger Screen —
If Equipped................................................................ 217
First Time Starting Up (Using the Rear Screens).... 217
Alexa Voice Control................................................... 218
Listen Via Vehicle Speakers..................................... 218
Quick Menu............................................................... 218
Parental Controls (Using the Rear Screens) ........... 218
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing (Using the Rear
Screens) .................................................................... 218
Media Sources Input (Using the Front Radio and
Rear Screens)............................................................219
Voice Remote with Alexa...........................................219
Replacing the Voice Remote with Alexa Batteries ..220
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV Built-In
streaming (Using the Front Radio and
Rear Screens)............................................................220
Fire TV Apps/Games
(Using the Rear Screens) ..........................................221
Are We There Yet?.....................................................221
Using The Video USB Port.........................................221
Play Video Games......................................................221
Headphones Operation.............................................221
Rear Climate Controls ...............................................222
Legal & Compliance ..................................................224
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED.................................224
Off-Road Pages Status Bar.......................................224
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................................225
Accessory Gauges .....................................................225
Pitch & Roll ................................................................225
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped......................................226
Suspension — If Equipped ........................................226
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..................226
Regulatory And Safety Information ..........................226
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................227
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................227
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ............................228
Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) — If Equipped ........228
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..................229
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ...................................... 235
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM).................................... 235
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation .. 238
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)................ 240
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................ 244
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ................... 244
Important Safety Precautions .................................. 244
Seat Belt Systems .................................................... 245
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .................. 252
Child Restraints......................................................... 262
SAFETY TIPS ..................................................................... 271
Transporting Passengers.......................................... 271
Transporting Pets...................................................... 272
Connected Vehicles .................................................. 272
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ...................................................................... 272
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .................................................. 273
Exhaust Gas ............................................................. 273
Carbon Monoxide Warnings..................................... 274
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .................................... 275
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED ................... 275
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..................................... 278
Preparations For Jacking.......................................... 278
Jack And Tools Location ........................................... 279
Spare Tire Stowage................................................... 279
Spare Tire Removal................................................... 280
Jacking Instructions ................................................. 281
JUMP STARTING .............................................................. 284
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 285
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 285
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY........................................... 286
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS........................................ 287
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .............................................. 288
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .......................................... 289
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..................................... 290
Rear-Wheel Drive Models......................................... 291
Four-Wheel Drive Models ......................................... 291
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped................................................................ 291
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) .. 292
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)..................................... 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 293
Maintenance Plan..................................................... 293
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 296
3.0L Engine............................................................... 296
5.7L Engine............................................................... 297
6.4L Engine............................................................... 298
Checking Oil Level — 3.0L Engines ......................... 299
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L & 6.4L Engines ............ 300
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................ 300
Maintenance-Free Battery ...................................... 300
Pressure Washing..................................................... 301
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................. 301
Engine Oil ................................................................. 301
Engine Oil Filter......................................................... 302
Engine Air Cleaner Filter........................................... 302
Air Conditioner Maintenance ................................... 303
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 305
Body Lubrication....................................................... 306
Windshield Wiper Blades..........................................306
Exhaust System ........................................................307
Cooling System..........................................................308
Brake System ...........................................................310
Automatic Transmission ...........................................311
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................................312
Transfer Case ...........................................................312
Fuses..........................................................................313
Bulb Replacement.....................................................330
TIRES..................................................................................331
Tire Safety Information .............................................331
Tires — General Information .....................................338
Tire Types...................................................................341
Spare Tires — If Equipped.........................................342
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................................343
Snow Traction Devices..............................................344
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................346
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...................................................346
Treadwear..................................................................346
Traction Grades.........................................................346
Temperature Grades.................................................347
STORING THE VEHICLE ....................................................347
BODYWORK ......................................................................347
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................347
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................348
Preserving The Bodywork .........................................348
INTERIORS ........................................................................348
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................................348
Plastic And Coated Parts ..........................................349
Leather Surfaces.......................................................349
Glass Surfaces ..........................................................349
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 350
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................................ 350
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 350
Torque Specifications ............................................... 350
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 351
3.0L Standard Output Engine ................................. 351
3.0L High Output Engine ......................................... 351
5.7L Engine ............................................................... 351
6.4L Engine ............................................................... 351
Reformulated Gasoline............................................. 351
Materials Added To Fuel........................................... 352
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends..................................... 352
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.............352
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.................. 352
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) In Gasoline..................................................... 352
Fuel System Cautions............................................... 353
FLUID CAPACITIES ........................................................... 353
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................... 354
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................. 355
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR
VEHICLE ............................................................................ 356
Prepare For The Appointment.................................. 356
Prepare A List............................................................ 356
Be Reasonable With Requests ................................ 356
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................ 356
Roadside Assistance ................................................ 356
FCA US LLC Customer Center .................................. 357
Wagoneer Client Services Canada .......................... 357
Mexico ....................................................................... 357
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ........................... 357
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY).................................................. 358
Service Contract ...................................................... 358
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................358
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................358
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................358
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........358
In Canada...................................................................359
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................359
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................360
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................360
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Wagoneer/Grand Wagoneer. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
The Wagoneer/Grand Wagoneer is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was
designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving on rugged terrain or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you drive this vehicle,
read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Driving skills improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or a collision
Ú page 184.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
INTRODUCTION 9
KNOW & GO
Explore The Exciting New Features Of Your Wagoneer Or Grand Wagoneer With The Know & Go App
Augmented Reality
See your vehicle like never before. Move your smartphone
around your vehicle to discover and identify features, and
to reveal information about how to use them to enhance
your ownership and driving experiences.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Features Library
Want to learn about your vehicle’s features anytime,
anywhere? Look them up in the Features Library to access
the same information that you would get via augmented
reality – including how-to videos and feature-specific
Owner’s Manual pages – when you are not at your vehicle.
Push Notifications
Do not miss out on all your vehicle has to offer. Enable
push notifications, on your smartphone, to get alerts
about features and capabilities you have not explored on
the app yet.
*Available for US Residents only
1
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts
could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the
topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 105.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 105
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 105
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 105
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 106
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light
Ú page 106
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 106
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 106
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 106
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 106
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 106
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light
Ú page 106
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
Ú page 107
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 107
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 107
Red Warning Lights
1
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 107
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 107
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 107
Yellow Warning Lights
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
Ú page 107
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 107
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault Warning Light
Ú page 108
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 108
Red Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 108
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 108
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
Ú page 108
Active Lane Management Warning Light
Ú page 108
Fuel Cutoff Failure Warning Light
Ú page 108
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 108
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 108
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light
Ú page 109
Yellow Warning Lights
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
Ú page 109
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 108
Oil Level Sensor Fault Warning Light
Ú page 109
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 109
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
Ú page 109
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Or Pedestrian Emergency Braking
(PEB) Warning Light
Ú page 109
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 109
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 109
Yellow Warning Lights
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
Ú page 110
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 110
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light
Ú page 110
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light
Ú page 110
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light
Ú page 110
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
Ú page 110
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
Ú page 110
Yellow Warning Lights
1
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) / Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Off
Indicator Light
Ú page 111
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Maximum Payload Exceeded Indicator Light
Ú page 111
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Yellow Indicator Lights
Auto HOLD Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Night Vision Active Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Green Indicator Lights
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 112
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Green Indicator Lights
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Gray Indicator Lights
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light
Ú page 112
White Indicator Lights
1
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter
‘n Go™, Remote Air Suspension Lowering, and Remote
Start. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock all doors and
liftgate, as well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances
up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which is
stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the key fob will
operate at distances up to 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
Ú page 78.
With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change positions with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by
referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow.
For more information on ignition positions, see
Ú page 20.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the LED
light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illu-
minates after a key fob button is pushed, then the key fob
battery requires replacement
Ú page 360.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds to
unlock all the doors and liftgate. To lock all the doors and
liftgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp.
1 — LED Indicator
2 — Unlock
3 — Remote Start
4 — Air Suspension Remote Lowering (If Equipped)
5 — Lock
6 — Power Liftgate
7 — Panic
8 — Emergency Key
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with the Auto Relock feature,
and is unlocked with the key fob, and no door is opened
within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and the
Vehicle Security system will arm (if equipped). This
feature can be enabled/disabled within Uconnect
Settings.
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open,
the doors will lock. The doors will unlock again auto-
matically if the key fob is left inside the passenger
compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push
of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
Using The Panic Feature
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic button
on the key fob. When the Panic feature is activated, the
turn signals will flash, the horn may pulse on and off (if
equipped with horn alarm), and the interior lights will turn
on.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position while the Panic feature is acti-
vated. However, the exterior lights and horn (if
equipped with horn alarm) will remain on.
You may need to be closer than 66 ft (20 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
feature due to the radio frequency noises emitted by
the system.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual
alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle
feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The
Vehicle) — If Equipped
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can be
lowered to Entry/Exit height by pushing the key
fob air suspension button two times. When air
suspension lowering is requested using the key
fob, the vehicle will send a series of chirps and flashes
(when enabled within Uconnect Settings) to alert the
customer that the operation has begun and will continue
these alerts until it successfully lowers.
The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to
lower remotely:
The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park) ride
height.
The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
All doors must be closed.
The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets, and people
prior to remote lowering.
Canceling Remote Lowering
Vehicle lowering can be canceled at anytime. When
vehicle lowering is canceled, the vehicle will raise up to the
next defined level and lock out the remote lowering
feature for five seconds before a new request can be
made.
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air
suspension button one time during the lowering process.
When vehicle lowering is canceled, the horn will chirp two
times and the turn signals will flash four times. Once
raising is completed, the horn will chirp one time.
NOTE:
For more information on Air Suspension, see Ú page 127.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the key fob
above the top row buttons blinks when a button is
pressed. The coin battery should last a minimum of
three years with normal vehicle usage.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
emergency key release button (1) on the side of the
key fob, and pulling the emergency key (2) out with
your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
Emergency Key Removed
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing down,
and locate the small rectangular gap on the left side
between the housing and the back cover of the key
fob. Use a small flat-bladed tool to pry open the left
side of the fob cover while applying pressure until the
cover snaps open.
Pry Apart Key Fob Halves
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key fob,
which is positioned farther to the edge than the left
side gap. Pry open the right side, and remove the
back cover.
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to slide the
battery downward and back toward the key ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
NOTE:
You can also insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the
battery removal pocket to pry the battery out.
Battery Removal Pocket
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on the
battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the new battery
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio-
ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to push
down and slide the battery under the small lip on the
top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top edge of
the back cover with the top of the fob, and press the
edges into the interlocking hinges until all edges snap
together with no large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified
technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children. If
the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from chil-
dren.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 360.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Igni-
tion, always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ON/RUN
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake pedal)
NOTE:
If the ignition position does not change with a push of
the ignition button, and the instrument cluster displays
a message such as “Key Fob Not Detected”, the key fob
may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a
backup method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite
of the emergency key) against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Replacement of the key fob battery is recommended.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
For more information on the engine starting procedure,
see
Ú page 115.
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF
position. In addition to the chime, the message “Igni-
tion ON” will display in the cluster.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
Headlight animation (if equipped) will occur when
Remote Start is activated, if “Headlight Illumination On
Approach” is enabled within Uconnect Settings.
For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in
the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security Light flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Panic button is not pushed
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the
settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next section
for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
if selected in the Comfort menu within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start is
activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings depending
on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
For more information on ATC and climate control settings,
see
Ú page 62.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The climate control setting will change, and exit automatic
operation, if manually adjusted by the driver while the
vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This includes the OFF
button on the climate controls, which will turn the system
off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security system
is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate
release handle are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the
following audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push the lock button on one of the front interior
power door lock switches with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
Touch the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 27.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the Vehicle
Security Light (located in the lower right portion of the
instrument cluster display) will begin to flash every two
seconds until it is disarmed.
NOTE:
If the system is armed by pushing the lock button on
the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security Light will
flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once the door is
closed, then slow down to every two seconds.
Pushing a lock button on the rear interior power door
lock switches will not arm the Vehicle Security system.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 27.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the
system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cylinder
when the alarm is armed will sound the alarm when the
door is opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed when the
power liftgate is opened using the liftgate button on the
key fob. If someone enters the vehicle through the
opened liftgate, then opens any door from the inside,
the alarm will sound.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the lift-
gate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and the
rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked unless all
doors are set to unlock on first press within Uconnect
Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and
then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock, or an emergency lock
lever
Ú page 26.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Deluxe Vehicle Security system monitors the doors,
hood latch, and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The system
also includes a dual function intrusion sensor and vehicle
tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle
interior for motion. The vehicle tilt sensor monitors the
vehicle for any tilting actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry
transport, etc.).
If a perimeter violation triggers the security system, the
horn will sound for 29 seconds and the exterior lights will
flash followed by approximately five seconds of no activity.
This will continue for eight cycles if no action is taken to
disarm the system.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the security system:
1. If any doors, windows, or the sunroof (if equipped)
are open, close them.
2. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Touch the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a key fob available in the same
exterior zone
Ú page 27.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
When armed, the interior motion sensor detects move-
ment within the vehicle's interior, including moving
objects (i.e. people and pets) and air currents through
open windows or the sunroof. The windows and
sunroof should be closed, and moving objects should
not be left in the vehicle when the intrusion detection
is armed, otherwise false alarms can occur.
Once the security system is armed, it remains in that
state until you disarm it by following either of the
disarming procedures described. If a power loss occurs
after arming the system, you must disarm the system
after restoring power to prevent alarm activation.
The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the
Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can turn off
the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming the
Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock button
on the key fob three times within 15 seconds of arming
the system (while the Vehicle Security Light is flashing
rapidly). The vehicle will remain locked but will disable
the alarm in the case of repeated false alarms due to
ambient conditions.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 27.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position
by pushing the START/STOP ignition button (requires at
least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. If a valid key fob or the Passive
Entry liftgate button is used to open the liftgate, the
motion sensing will be suppressed until after the lift-
gate is closed. If someone enters the vehicle through
the opened liftgate, then opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the
Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can turn off
the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming the
Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock button
on the key fob three times within 15 seconds of arming
the system (while the Vehicle Security Light is flashing
rapidly). The vehicle will remain locked but will disable
the alarm in the case of repeated false alarms due to
ambient conditions.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock, or an emergency lock
lever
Ú page 26.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The front doors can be manually unlocked with a single
pull of the inside door handle. The driver’s door can also
be manually locked/unlocked by inserting the emergency
key into the lock cylinder on the outside door handle.
Driver’s Door Cylinder Lock
The rear doors can be manually unlocked with a double
pull of the inside door handle.
All doors except the driver’s door can be manually locked
by inserting the emergency key into the emergency lock
lever and sliding the lever upward. The emergency lock
lever is located on the door latch face of each door.
Emergency Lock Lever
NOTE:
The emergency lock lever is only accessible when the
door is open.
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
Security system.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock buttons are located on each front
door panel. Use these buttons to lock or unlock all doors
and liftgate.
When the doors are locked, an indicator light in the lock
button will illuminate.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the key fob is
detected inside the vehicle when the door lock button on
the front door panel is used to lock the door, then the door
is closed. The horn will also chirp to alert the driver. This
will occur for two attempts. On the third attempt, the doors
will lock even if the key fob is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device, the wireless signal may get
blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock automati-
cally.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in ON/
RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock.
Rear Passenger Power Door Locks
Power door lock buttons are located on each rear door
trim panel. Push the lock button to lock the rear door or
push the unlock button to unlock the rear door.
POWER SIDE STEPS — IF EQUIPPED
The Power Side Steps will extend for easier entry and exit
of the vehicle.
When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power Side Steps
will deploy when any of the doors are opened, and they will
retract when the doors are closed. This mode can be
turned on or off in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
NOTE:
When enabled within Uconnect Settings, the Power
Side Steps can also be manually extended or retracted
by pressing the Power Side Step button on the Controls
menu of the Vehicle screen.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), the steps
will retract.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
P
ASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
If equipped, the rear doors will also have Passive Entry
capabilities.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings Ú page 187.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry handle from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, parking lights, door
handle pocket lights [if equipped]) for whichever dura-
tion is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive
Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
signals.
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or if
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock and lock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
The doors may lock and unlock when water is sprayed
on the Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is
located outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
Passive Entry lock initiates one horn chirp and one
flash of turn signals. These settings can be
programmed on/off within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
will arm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped).
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the front passenger door
handle (or a rear handle when equipped with four-door
Passive Entry) will unlock all doors and the liftgate
automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver’s door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 187.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger (or a rear
door when equipped with four-door Passive Entry) door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm or
armed status and the liftgate transitions from opened
to closed.
When the liftgate transitions from open to closed and
Remote Start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
The doors are manually locked using the emergency
lock lever.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door
handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle, touch the lock icon
on the door handle to lock all four doors and liftgate.
Touch The Door Handle Lock Icon To Lock
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when touching the lock icon.
This could unlock the door(s).
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After touching the door handle lock icon, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors
using any Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release button. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release handle for a power open on
vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Push the electronic
liftgate button and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
Liftgate Entry
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located on the
outside liftgate door handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all doors
and the liftgate Ú page 360.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks after the following sequence of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 187.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in
PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature is enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the locked position.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering
column control is located below the multifunction lever on
the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use
the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
saved positions
Ú page 31.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has three
temperature settings. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the
operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not
turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
left side of the radio screen or within the Uconnect system.
You can gain access to the control button on the top left
side of the screen by tapping the temperature controls,
which will provide a quick drop-down menu containing the
controls, or through the controls screen of the
touchscreen. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
button on the side of the radio, you can also access the
control button through the climate screen.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside with the Child-Protection locks engaged
(locked).
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the MED setting on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a third time to
turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 23.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver, and if equipped, also the
front passenger to save up to two different memory
profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each
memory profile saves desired position settings for the
following features:
Driver’s Side
Seat position
Easy entry/exit seat (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column
Power adjustable pedals (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
Passenger’s Side (If Equipped)
Seat position
The memory settings switches are located on the front
door panels, next to the door handle, and consists of two
or three buttons, depending on trim level:
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two saved memory profiles
The set (S) button (Wagoneer models only), which is
used to activate the memory save function
Wagoneer Memory Settings Buttons
Grand Wagoneer Memory Settings Buttons
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either driver’s side memory position 1 or 2.
Front passenger memory settings cannot be linked to a
key fob.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile
from memory.
Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and
telescopic steering column, and radio station
presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster
display will indicate which memory position has been
set.
Grand Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and
telescopic steering column, and radio station
presets).
3. Press memory button (1) or (2) for two or more
seconds. The instrument cluster display will indicate
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) to recall a
memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
saved driver’s side memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature through the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired driver’s side memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or
(2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will
display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s side
memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within
10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
Grand Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Recall the desired memory profile (1 or 2).
3. Press the memory button (1) or (2) (according to the
previous selection) for two seconds or more, and
release.
4. Push and hold the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s side
memory settings by pushing the memory button (1) or (2)
for two seconds or more and releasing, and then within
10 seconds, pushing and holding the unlock button on the
key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
Memory Recall is available when not in PARK, if the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
To recall a memory settings using the memory
switches, push memory button (1) or (2) on the
memory switch.
To recall the driver’s side memory settings using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked
to memory position 1 or 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall, or by pushing any of the seat
adjustment switches. When a recall is canceled, the seat
and power tilt/telescopic steering column will stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT FORWARD/REAR-
WARD ADJUSTMENT
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat
near the floor and release it when the seat is at the
desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT RECLINE
ADJUSTMENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat. Then, push the seat
rearward to the desired position and release the lever. To
return the seatback to its normal position, lean forward
and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback is latched, use
body pressure to lean forward and rearward.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
To recline the center seat, pull the recline strap located on
the seatback, and move forward or backward as desired.
Release the strap when the desired seat position has
been reached.
Center Seat Recline Strap
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SECOND ROW BENCH FOLD FLAT SEAT
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position especially
if the seat is equipped with Rear Seat Entertainment. Also,
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
To lower the seatback, pull upward on the recline lever
located on the outboard side of the seat, and let the
seatback fold forward automatically.
Second Row Bench Seat Folded Flat
To lower the center seatback, pull the recline strap,
located on the left side of the seatback, and let the
seatback fold forward automatically.
Center Seat Recline Strap
To raise the seatback, fold the seatback up into its original
position and lock it into place.
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT EASY ACCESS FOR
THIRD ROW
The second row bench seats can slide forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Press the easy entry button located on the outboard side
of the seatback. Once pressed, the seat will pitch forward,
allowing the seat to slide forward.
Bench Seat Easy Entry Button
To return the seat to a sitting position, push the seatback
rearward until the seat locks.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Emergency Straps
In the event that the vehicle loses power, the Easy Entry
buttons will not function. There are emergency straps
located on the back of the second row outboard seats to
allow the third row occupants to manually fold the seats
flat to exit the vehicle.
Emergency Straps
Pull the emergency straps to fold the second row seat flat.
Second Row Captain’s Chairs —
If Equipped
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FORWARD/
REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat
near the floor and release it when the seat is at the
desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS RECLINE
ADJUSTMENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat. Then, push the seat
rearward to the desired position and release the lever. To
return the seatback to its normal position, lean forward
and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback is latched, use
body pressure to lean forward and rearward.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD FLAT
SEATS
The second row seatbacks can be folded flat to carry
cargo.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position especially
if the seat is equipped with Rear Seat Entertainment. Also,
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pull upward on the recline lever located on the outboard
side of each second row seat, and let the seatback fold
forward automatically.
Second Row Captain’s Chair Folded Flat
To Raise The Rear Seats
Fold the seatbacks upward to their original position, and
lock them into place.
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIR EASY ACCESS
FOR THIRD ROW
The second row captain’s chairs can slide forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Press the easy entry button located on the outboard side
of the seatback. Once pressed, the entire seat will pitch
forward, allowing the seat to slide forward.
Captain’s Chair Easy Entry Button
To return the seat to a sitting position, push the seatback
rearward until the seat locks.
Emergency Straps
In the event that the vehicle loses power, the Easy Entry
buttons will not function. There are emergency straps
located on the back of the second row outboard seats to
allow the third row occupants to manually fold the seats
flat to exit the vehicle.
Emergency Straps
Pull the emergency straps to fold the second row seat flat.
Manual Folding Third Row — If Equipped
Both third row seats can be folded flat to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat, pull on the release straps
located on both sides of the rear cargo area, near the
bottom of the seat.
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full upright position
or folded flat when folding the third row seats.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Release Straps
Third Row Folded
To raise the seat, pull the seatback up and push back to
lock it into place. You can also use the return straps in the
rear cargo area, on the back of the seat.
Return Straps
To recline the seat, pull the recline straps, located on the
sides of the seat.
Recline Straps
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wagoneer models will be equipped with 8-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Wagoneer Power Seat Switches
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Grand Wagoneer models will be equipped with 20-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The power seat
switches are located on the driver and front passenger
door panels near the door handles. These switches control
the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Grand Wagoneer Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback recline switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
For Grand Wagoneer models, the angle of the upper
seatback can also be adjusted forward or rearward. Push
the upper seatback switch forward or rearward, and the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Bolster Adjustment —
If Equipped
In Grand Wagoneer models, the front driver and
passenger seatback and seat cushion bolsters can be
extended outward, or retracted inward by using the (+)
and (–) adjustment switches on the door panel. The
bolsters can also be adjusted directly in the Front Comfort
And Convenience Display or the Uconnect display.
1 — Front Headrest Adjustment Switch
2 — Power Massage Switch
3 — Decrease Back/Thigh Bolster & Lumbar Switch
4 — Increase Back/Thigh Bolster & Lumbar Switch
5 — Upper Seatback Switch
6 — Seatback Recline Switch
7 — Seat Switch (Multiple Functions)
8 — Cushion Extender Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Push the (+) switch to extend the bolsters, or push the (–)
switch to retract the bolsters.
Seat Bolster Adjustment Switches
When either the (+) or the (–) switch is pushed, the Front
Comfort And Convenience Display
Ú page 63 will change
to the Seat menu. The last selected seat item of lumbar
in/out, lumbar up/down, back bolster, or thigh bolster will
be retained. Select the desired adjustment type, and then
press the (+) or (–) switch to adjust.
NOTE:
If the Front Comfort And Convenience Display is in the
stowed position, the Seat menu will appear in the main
Uconnect display.
Cushion Extender — If Equipped
In Grand Wagoneer models, the cushion can be extended
forward a couple inches (centimeters) to increase thigh
support. Push the cushion extender switch forward or
rearward to extend or retract the cushion. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The front driver and passenger seats may be equipped
with power lumbar adjustment.
The Wagoneer power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward
to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward
to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or
downward on the switch will raise and lower the position
of the support.
Wagoneer Power Lumbar Adjustment Switch
The Grand Wagoneer power lumbar adjustment switches
are located on the door trim. The (+) and (–) switches can
be used to adjust lumbar support in/out and up/down.
The power lumbar can also be adjusted directly in the
Front Comfort And Convenience Display or the Uconnect
display.
Grand Wagoneer Power Lumbar Adjustment Switches
When either the (+) or the (–) switch is pushed, the Front
Comfort And Convenience Display
Ú page 63 will change
to the Seat menu. The last selected seat item of lumbar
in/out, lumbar up/down, back bolster, or thigh bolster will
be retained. Select the desired adjustment type, and then
press the (+) or (–) switch to adjust.
NOTE:
If the Front Comfort And Convenience Display is in the
stowed position, the Seat menu will display on the main
Uconnect screen.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (6 cm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
equal to 2.7 inches (7 cm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (2.3 cm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy
Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile
Ú page 31.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the
vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit
feature is enabled or disabled through the programmable
features in the Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
If equipped, the power recline switch for the third row
seats is located on the trim panel next to the seat. This
switch adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward for
occupant comfort.
Third Row Power Recline Switch
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward button.
The seat will move in the direction of the button push.
Release the button when the desired position is released.
Rear Seat Power Folding Seatbacks —
If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel inside the cargo area, as part of a
switch bank.
The switch bank allows multiple power folding positions
for the second and third row seats.
The second row seats can be folded using these switches,
while the third row can be folded or unfolded.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third
row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned prop-
erly on the occupant and they could be more seri-
ously injured in an accident as a result.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
The third row seat belts may interfere with the power
folding of the seat. Place the seat belt webbing behind the
stow clip before stowing or opening the seat. When the
seat is in the desired position, remove the webbing from
the stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never leave the
seat belt in the stow clip when it is used to restrain an
occupant.
NOTE:
The head restraints will lower automatically as neces-
sary when the power seat begins to move Ú page 43.
The head restraint can also be lowered manually using
the pull strap located at the back of the seat.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
There are also power folding switches for the third row
seats located on the C-pillar (just behind the rear doors on
the trim panels).
C-Pillar Power Folding Switches (Left Side Shown)
POWER SEAT MASSAGE — IF EQUIPPED
In Grand Wagoneer models, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats may be equipped with power massage.
The seat massage feature can be turned on/off through
the massage button located on the door panel near the
handle, or through the Controls menu on the radio screen.
Door Panel Massage Button
Once activated by either method, the massage controls
screen will display on the Front Comfort And Convenience
Display
Ú page 63, or on the standard Uconnect display if
the Front Comfort And Convenience Display is stowed.
“Massage Type” and “Intensity Level” can be selected for
the activated seat.
There are four intensity levels and five massage types that
can be selected.
Intensity Levels:
High
Med
Low
Off
Massage Types:
Waterfall
Lower Back
Extend
Low Extend
Rock Climb
1 — Second Row Left Side Fold
2 — Second Row Right Side Fold
3 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
4 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
1 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
2 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
The massage type and intensity level status will be
synchronized between the main Uconnect display and the
Front Comfort And Convenience Display.
The selected settings will save in the system’s memory
when turned off, and will resume the next time the system
is turned on.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with a selectable back/cushion
feature for massage seats, the massage feature can
be deselected for either the seatback or seat cushion.
If both options are deselected, massage will turn off.
The engine must be running for the power seatback
massage to operate.
The massage feature will turn off after 20 minutes of
use. However, if the massage type or intensity level is
changed, the timer then resets.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are
located on the sides of the radio or within the
Uconnect system. You can access the controls
through the Climate screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting
on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
MED setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the LO
setting on.
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
The heating elements can be turned on in the seatback
only, seat cushion only, or both. Press the seat image on
the touchscreen or push the seat zone button on the side
of the radio to cycle through these seat zones. An LED will
illuminate next to the selected zone(s). If equipped with
touchscreen buttons, the selected zones will be
highlighted on the seat image.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 23.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches for each heater
are located on the rear of the center console.
If equipped with a Rear Comfort And Convenience Display,
heated seat settings can be selected within the display
Ú page 67.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings.
Indicator lights in each switch illuminate indicating the
level of heat in use.
Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI setting
on.
Push the heated seat switch a second time to turn the
MED setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn the LO
setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
WARNING!
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the occupant cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
Front Ventilated Seats
The ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the sides of the radio or within the
Uconnect system. The fans operate at three
speeds: HI, MED and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to choose
LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to turn
the ventilation off.
The fans can be turned on in the seatback only, seat
cushion only, or both. Press the seat image on the
touchscreen or push the seat zone button on the side of
the radio to cycle through these seat zones. An LED will
illuminate next to the selected zone(s). If equipped with
touchscreen buttons, the selected zones will be
highlighted on the seat image.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 23.
Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may be
equipped with ventilated seats. The rear
ventilated seat control switches are located on
the rear of the center console and allow the
rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
If equipped with a Rear Comfort And Convenience Display,
ventilated seat settings can be selected within the display
Ú page 67.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF fan speed.
Indicator lights in each switch illuminate indicating the
level of fan speed in use.
Push the ventilated seat switch once to choose HI.
Push the ventilated seat switch a second time to
choose MED.
Push the ventilated seat switch a third time to choose
LO.
Push the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to turn
the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver and
passenger head restraints.
The Wagoneer is equipped with manual four-way head
restraints, and the Grand Wagoneer is equipped with
power four-way head restraints with adjustable wings.
If your vehicle is equipped with manual front head
restraints, to raise the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located on the left side of the head
restraint, and pull upward on the head restraint. To lower
the head restraint, push the adjustment button, and push
downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli-
sion.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wagoneer Head Restraint Adjustment Button
To adjust the head restraint forward, press the adjustment
button on the left side of the head restraint, and pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as
desired and release. To adjust the head restraint
rearward, press the adjustment button, and push the top
of the head restraint toward the rear of the vehicle as
desired and release.
Upright Position (Manual Head Restraint)
Upward Adjustment (Manual Head Restraint)
Grand Wagoneer Head Restraint Adjustment Switch
If your vehicle is equipped with power front head
restraints, push upward or push downward on the head
restraint adjustment switch, located on the door trim
panel, to raise or lower the head restraint. The head
restraint will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
The head restraint can also be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the head restraint switch forward or
rearward. The head restraint will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Upright Position (Power Head Restraint)
Forward Adjustment (Power Head Restraint)
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
(Continued)
Grand Wagoneer front power head restraints are also
equipped with adjustable wings, located on the outer
left-hand and right-hand front face of the head restraint.
Adjustable Wing (Left-Hand Side Shown)
To adjust the wings for additional comfort and support,
pull forward on the wings. To return the wings, push the
wings rearward to the flat position.
Wing Adjustment
Wing Extended (Left-Hand Side Shown)
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
Head Restraints — Second Row Captain’s
Chairs
If the second row is equipped with captain’s chairs, the
head restraints are not adjustable or removable. They
automatically fold forward when the seatback is folded,
and do not return to their normal position when the
seatback is raised. After returning the seatback to its
upright position after a folding operation, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place.
The driver can also fold the second row outboard head
restraints through the radio, for improved visibility when
the vehicle is in REVERSE and there are no occupants in
the seats.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system to
power fold the second row outboard head
restraints.
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the second row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
second row seats.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli-
sion.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
If the second row is equipped with a bench seat, the head
restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable or
removable. They automatically fold forward when the
seatback is folded, and do not return to their normal
position when the seatback is raised. After returning the
seatback to its upright position after a folding operation,
raise the head restraint until it locks in place.
The driver can also fold the second row outboard head
restraints through the radio, for improved visibility when
the vehicle is in REVERSE, and there are no occupants in
the seats.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system to
power fold the second row outboard head
restraints.
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the second row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
second row seats.
The center head restraint has one adjustment position,
and can be adjusted up, when the seat is occupied, or
down for storage. To adjust this head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, while pulling upward or pushing downward until
it locks into place.
NOTE:
The center head restraint is not removable.
Center Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
For information on child restraint tethering, see
Ú page 244.
Third Row Head Restraints
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing or height adjustment
Ú page 244.
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The center head restraint should only be removed by qual-
ified technicians, for service purposes only. If the head
restraint requires removal, see an authorized dealer.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli-
sion.
WARNING!
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli-
sion.
WARNING!
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
The third row outboard head restraints are not adjustable
or removable, but can be folded for improved visibility
when the vehicle is in REVERSE, and there are no
occupants in the seats.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system to
power fold the third row head restraints.
The head restraints will also automatically fold when the
seatbacks are folded forward using the release handles
on the backs of the seats from the cargo area.
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic voice commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or say the vehicle’s Wake Up word
“Hey Uconnect”. The factory default Wake Up word is set
to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed through the
Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system. You can also use the system’s
Wake Up word to activate voice recognition. The Wake Up
word can be set through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the VR
button or say the Wake Up word, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
You can also interrupt the help message or system
prompts by speaking. This feature is called “barge-in”
and can be set through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli-
sion.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Ú page 360.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake and
accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver
to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located on the instrument
panel, next to the headlight switch.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition in the OFF
position.
The pedals
cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system or Adap-
tive Cruise Control system is on. If there is an attempt
to adjust the pedals when the system is locked out, one
of the following messages will appear:
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
movement of the pedal.
Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings
Ú page 31, you can use your key fob or the memory
switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return the
adjustable pedals to saved positions.
1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push The
Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media,
Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And
Send Or Receive A Text
1 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The
Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push To Access The Tile Feature
3 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call Currently In
Progress
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or
impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage to
the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal's path.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right.
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
You can turn the feature on or off through the Uconnect
system Ú page 187.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high definition,
wide and unobstructed view of the road behind while
driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic Dimming
Mirror mode, then activate the Digital Rearview Mirror
mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/off
control lever on the bottom of the mirror rearward toward
the driver.
Digital Rearview Mirror
Push the menu button next to the on/off control/toggle to
access the following mirror options:
Brightness
Tilt
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through menu
options.
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward the
windshield to return the mirror to the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective during
nighttime driving in low light applications due to low
ambient light levels. In the event that it provides the
user with less than expected vision, the mirror can be
reverted to a normal reflective Automatic Dimming
Mirror by pushing the control/toggle forward in the
vehicle and putting the mirror into Automatic Dimming
Mirror mode.
When the rear window washer is activated by pushing
the windshield wiper/washer lever forward, the rear
Back Up and Digital Rearview Mirror (if equipped)
cameras are also washed. For more information, see
Ú page 62.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Lift Cover On Vanity Mirror
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and
approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are located in
the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the key fob or open
any door. This LED shines outward to illuminate the front
and rear door handles. It also shines downward to
illuminate the area in front of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the gear
selector is moved out of the PARK position.
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The exterior driver side mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirror will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation
mirror to view all of the passengers in the vehicle. Push the
panel to release the drop down mirror, raise it back up to
3/4 of the way and let go; a latch will hold the mirror in
place. Raise the mirror all the way and push to latch it back
in the stowed position.
NOTE:
From the conversation mirror position, do not pull the door
fully open because it will damage the door. The door must
be put back in the closed position before fully opening it.
Conversation Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the driver's
side door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the desired
mirror: (L) or (R). Then push the switch in the direction that
you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
NOTE:
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to the
neutral position to prevent accidental movements.
Power Folding — If Equipped
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding Mirror
function, rotate the control switch to the power folding
position. Rotating the control to the left, right, or neutral
position will return the mirrors to the driving position.
If the power mirror control switch is moved again during
door mirror folding (from closed to open position and vice
versa), the movement direction is reversed.
NOTE:
The Power Folding Mirror function is only available when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded
(by hand or by pushing the power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by turning the switch (this may require multiple switch
activations to synchronize the driver and passenger
mirror). This resets them to their normal position.
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the Driver
Memory Settings (if equipped)
Ú page 31.
AUTOMATIC POWER FOLDING
MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
When enabled within Uconnect Settings Ú page 187, the
exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the vehicle’s
ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after the doors
are locked and closed.
The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following
situations after the ignition is placed in the OFF position:
Pushing the lock button on the door panel before the
door is opened.
NOTE:
If the doors are already locked, push the lock button again.
Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on the
door panel, followed by closing the door.
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push the
lock button on the key fob.
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch the
lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle.
Automatic Unfolding
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they will
unfold based on the selection with the Uconnect system:
When the vehicle is unlocked using the key fob
When the vehicle is unlocked using a Passive Entry
door handle
1 — Neutral Position
2 — Left Mirror
3 — Control Switch
4 — Right Mirror
5 — Power Folding Position (If Equipped)
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When Proximity Wake-Up is activated Ú page 57
When the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
NOTE:
If the mirrors were folded manually by using the power
folding mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will
not automatically unfold.
HEATED MIRRORS
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 62.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sun visor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active
Ú page 360.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good indi-
cator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices manu-
factured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with a
rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 53. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The
headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transmitter with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the AUTO position for automatic
headlights. Rotate to the second detent to turn on
headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel lights
operation.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever the
engine is running, and the low beams are not on. The
lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in the OFF
or ON/RUN position, or the parking brake is engaged. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will
turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system provides
increased forward lighting at night by automating high
beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted
on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system can be
turned on or off by selecting or deselecting “Auto High
Beam” within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
The headlight switch must also be turned to the AUTO
position after Automatic High Beams is enabled within
Uconnect Settings for the feature to activate.
Automatic High Beams will only activate when the
vehicle speed is above 22 mph (35 km/h).
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlight
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be
programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds
Ú page 187.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the
O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
HEADLIGHTS ON AUTOMATICALLY WITH
W
IPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
vehicle will monitor outside brightness and decide if the
instrument panel needs to be dimmed or not
Ú page 59.
HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON
A
PPROACH
When enabled, the headlights, exterior door handle
pocket lights (if equipped), and interior lights will
illuminate when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed as the operator is approaching the vehicle. This
feature can be turned on/off, and the length of time
the headlights stay on can be programmed for up to
90 seconds within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Proximity Wake-Up — If Equipped
This feature is enabled/disabled within the Uconnect
system, and is activated when the operator approaches
the driver’s door, passenger’s door, or liftgate with a valid
key fob on their person. Some exterior and interior lights
will illuminate in order to provide an increased sense of
welcome and security as the operator approaches the
vehicle in the dark. “Headlight Illumination On Approach”
must be selected and set to a time value other than zero
within Uconnect Settings for Proximity Wake-Up to
activate.
The doors may be locked or unlocked for this feature to
activate, as long as the ignition is in the OFF position, or
during a Remote Start event. It will not activate if the doors
are locked and the ignition was placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
Proximity Wake-Up may not activate under the following
conditions:
After numerous consecutive activations, in order to
conserve the vehicle’s battery
After the vehicle’s engine has been off for several days
Headlight Animation — If Equipped
When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is turned on,
and set to a time value above zero, the exterior lights
illuminate in a theatrical manner during approach to the
vehicle. This feature is activated in the following
situations:
Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is activated
Remote Start is activated
The unlock button on the key fob is pushed
NOTE:
For Headlight Animation to activate with Remote Start or
with the push of the unlock button, “Greeting Lights” must
also be selected within the Uconnect system.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the headlight
switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning the
headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in
the ON position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay time is programmable through
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound
when the driver’s door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights, and push the fog light button on
the headlight switch.
Fog Light Button
Fog Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are
on, or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the button is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the turn
signal indicator is on. It can be activated through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position and any door is
left ajar for 10 minutes or if the overhead console Dome
ON switch is pressed, and the interior lights are on for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in the ON
position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn
off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and
left on for eight minutes while the ignition is in the OFF
position, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or the Dome ON button is pushed on the
overhead console. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote
Keyless Entry and the unlock button is pushed on the key
fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door
is open and the interior lights are on, pressing the Dome
Defeat button on the overhead console will cause all of the
interior lights to turn off. This allows the doors to stay open
for extended periods of time without discharging the
vehicle’s battery.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be operated
individually as reading lights by pushing the corresponding
buttons.
Courtesy Lights
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights
Located above the rear passenger seating in both second
and third rows, along the trim, are courtesy/reading lights.
The courtesy lights turn on when a door or the liftgate is
opened. The lights will also turn on when the unlock button
on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
the lens button to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Push the lens button a second time to turn each
light off.
1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Ambient Light
4 — Dome ON Button
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to the
headlight switch located on the left side of the instrument
panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument cluster lights. Rotating the left dimmer control
will adjust the interior light levels of the ambient lighting
on the instrument panel and doors. The ambient lighting
may be color customizable
Ú page 60.
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Ambient lighting in the second and third row seating
areas may not be equipped in the vehicle.
The dimming of the touchscreen is programmable
through the Uconnect system Ú page 187.
Multicolor Ambient Lighting — If Equipped
The color of certain ambient lighting inside of the vehicle
can be selected within the Apps menu on the radio screen,
or within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187. Brightness is
adjusted using the ambient light dimmer control on the
headlight switch.
Five colors can be selected for the following two zones
inside of the vehicle:
Zone 1:
Instrument panel decorative ambient lights
Door panel decorative ambient lights
Zone 2:
Front seat footwell areas below the instrument
panel
Lighting below the second row seats
Map pocket lighting on all four door panels
These areas can be set to different colors, or if the SYNC
button is selected within the settings menu, all colored
lights will be set to the same color automatically.
NOTE:
All other ambient lighting inside of the vehicle will remain
white, and the ambient light dimmer control switch will
adjust all ambient lighting at the same time.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The Illuminated Entry feature allows you to activate the
low beam, parking lights, and side marker lights for
25 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked (through the key
fob or the Passive Entry door handles [if equipped]).
This feature can be activated or deactivated through the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
NOTE:
When a door is open with the feature active, the activa-
tion of the lights is extended for five seconds.
The feature is disabled when the vehicle is locked or
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right
side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated
by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper Operation
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the
end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within the
lever all the way down to OFF.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the switch at the end of the wiper lever
to the first detent position, and then turn the switch at the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to
a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles.
The delay intervals will double in duration when the
vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and
hold. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent setting,
the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is
pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers
will operate several cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal opera-
tion.
If the front window washer feature is activated, all of
the front cameras (if equipped) on the vehicle will be
washed as well.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the MIST position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 306.
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
windshield wiper lever to one of the four detent positions
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 is the
least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position 4 is the most
sensitive.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind-
shield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce
rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first placed
in the ON position, when the vehicle is stationary and
the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless
the wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is
moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h) or the outside temperature rises above
freezing.
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will not
operate when the ignition is ON, when the transmission
gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is moved,
the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or
the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL posi-
tion.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the lever is
pushed while on the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is
pushed while the wiper is in the off position, the wiper will
operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
When the rear window washer is activated, the rear Back
Up camera and Digital Rearview Mirror (if equipped)
cameras are also washed.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of
a cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
when the ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and when the ambient tempera-
ture is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation — When Remote
Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is
less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
will activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was
active, the timer and operation will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Or 12-inch Display
Temperature Controls
Instrument Panel Climate Control Toggle Switches
Front Comfort And Convenience Display —
If Equipped
The Front Comfort And Convenience Display is a
retractable screen located below the main Uconnect
display that controls the front and rear climate settings
just as the Controls menu would within the Uconnect
system.
Other front seat functions can also be adjusted from this
screen, such as:
Power Massage Seat
Ú page 41
Power Lumbar
Ú page 39
Power Bolster
Ú page 38
Front Comfort And Convenience Display Location
NOTE:
The Front Comfort And Convenience Display can only be
used if the vehicle is in the ON/RUN position.
To stow this display and access the power outlet, USB ports,
and wireless charging pad, push the screen open/close
hard button below the display, in front of the gear selector.
Pushing the button again will lower the screen for use.
Screen Open/Close Button
NOTE:
When the open/close button is pushed to stow the Front
Comfort And Convenience Display screen, the screen will
turn off and save the menu it was on prior to being stowed.
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to automatically turn the air
conditioning on to the coldest temperature
setting and the highest blower speed. The MAX
A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will
turn off. Pressing other setting buttons will also cause the
MAX A/C to turn off.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Pressing the MAX A/C button on the front climate
control screen will not set the rear A/C to MAX unless
the rear A/C was already active. If the rear A/C is not
active, pressing the MAX A/C button will not turn on the
rear A/C.
For best A/C performance, it is recommended that the
rear A/C be turned to ON or AUTO and synced to the
driver’s climate settings.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button on the
touchscreen, or push the toggle switch on the
faceplate down, to turn the air conditioning on.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation button on
the touchscreen, or push the toggle switch on
the faceplate down, to change the system
between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may
be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of Recirculation mode may make the
inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Press the AUTO button on the touchscreen, or
push toggle switch on the faceplate down to
automatically control the front driver and
passenger area’s temperature by adjusting
distribution and amount of airflow. Performing this
function will cause the system to switch between manual
mode and automatic modes
Ú page 69. AUTO mode is
highly recommended for efficiency.
MAX Defrost Button
Press the MAX Defrost button on the
touchscreen, or push the toggle switch on the
faceplate down, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator
illuminates when this feature is on. Performing this
function will cause the automatic climate controls to
change to manual mode.
When MAX Defrost mode is selected:
The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on)
Air conditioning compressor is turned on (LED on)
Both driver and passenger temperature controls are
set to HI
Defrost mode is selected (LED on)
Rear defroster is turned on (LED on)
Air recirculation is turned off (LED off)
If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate Control
system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push the toggle switch on the
faceplate down, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Switches
These toggle switches provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control by pushing the
single switch upward or downward.
Instrument Panel Toggle Switches
Push upward on the driver’s or passenger’s
side toggle switch on the faceplate, or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push downward the driver’s or
passenger’s side toggle switch on the faceplate, or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
turn the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC is
used to synchronize the front passenger
temperature and rear passenger temperature, mode, and
blower settings with the driver temperature, mode, and
blower settings. Changing the front passenger
temperature or rear passenger temperature, mode, and
blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
When SYNC is not active, the rear passenger climate
control settings will need to be adjusted manually to
achieve desired comfort. See
Ú page 66 and
Ú page 67 for more information.
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control
system. There are several blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using
the blower control buttons on the touchscreen.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the
numbered blower speed on the bar area between the
blower icons.
NOTE:
You can also adjust the blower speed by pushing the
single blower control toggle switch on the faceplate. Push
the toggle switch downward to decrease speed, or upward
to increase speed.
Blower Control Toggle Switch
Tri-Mode Climate
Three airflow distribution modes can be selected on/off
individually by pressing the icons on the touchscreen for
up to seven combinations of airflow. The icons on the
screen will illuminate when selected, and turn off when
deselected.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The three airflow modes are:
Windshield (Front Defrost outlets)
Face (instrument panel outlets)
Feet (floor outlets)
Mode Control Button On The Instrument Panel
The airflow distribution mode can also be
selected by pushing the hard toggle switch on
the instrument panel, below the radio screen.
Pushing this toggle switch down will cycle
through the seven mode combinations in order: Face,
Face/Feet, Feet, Windshield/Feet, Windshield,
Windshield/Face, and Windshield/Face/Feet. The cycle
will repeat if the button is continually pushed.
NOTE:
The distribution modes on the climate control screen will
also illuminate when a selection is made using the button
on the instrument panel.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the blower control button
on the faceplate and release when the OFF
setting has been reached, to turn the Climate
Control system on/off.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front Climate Screen
Four-Zone Rear Climate Controls From Front Climate Screen
The Three-Zone and Four-Zone Climate Control system
allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the
front screen. This can be done through either the main
Uconnect display, or the Front Comfort And Convenience
Display (if equipped).
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone Climate Control system, the
temperature of left and right sides of the rear passenger
zones can be adjusted separately from the front or rear
climate screens.
To change to the rear climate control screen:
Press the “Rear” icon on the touchscreen to display the
rear climate controls. The control functions now
operate the rear system.
Press the “Front” icon on the touchscreen to return to
the front climate controls.
LOCK REAR CLIMATE
Press and release the “Lock Rear” icon to lock
out manual control of the rear temperature and
blower settings made from the rear climate
control display. The “Lock Rear” icon will
illuminate and the text will update to “Unlock Rear” when
this feature is selected. When the feature is deselected,
the text will change back to “Lock Rear” and will no longer
be illuminated.
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release “Auto” on the rear climate
control screen to control the selected rear
passenger temperature by automatically
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. The
“Auto” icon will illuminate when this feature is selected,
and will turn off when deselected. Pressing any other
climate control function for the rear system will cause the
rear system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes
Ú page 69.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC To Driver icon on the rear
climate control screen to turn the SYNC feature
on/off. SYNC is used to synchronize all front
and rear passenger zones to the driver’s set
temperature, mode, and blower settings. The SYNC
indicator will illuminate when SYNC is on. Changing the
front driver climate settings will adjust all passenger
settings automatically. If the front passenger or rear
climate settings are adjusted while SYNC is on, SYNC will
automatically exit.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE:
When SYNC is not active, the rear passenger climate
control settings will need to be adjusted manually to
achieve desired comfort. See
Ú page 66 and Ú page 67
for more information.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Rear Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the rear climate
system. There are several blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using
the buttons on the touchscreen. Use the small blower icon
(or blower icon with the downward arrow) to reduce the
blower setting, and the large blower icon (or blower icon
with the upward arrow) to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Two airflow distribution modes for the rear seat
passengers can be selected on/off from the front climate
screen by individually by pressing the icons on the
touchscreen for up to three combinations of airflow. The
icons on the screen will illuminate when selected, and turn
off when deselected.
The two airflow modes are:
Face (panel outlets)
Feet (floor outlets)
NOTE:
If Auto is selected, these icons will no longer be available
and the current mode selection will be overwritten.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
To turn the rear climate controls off, press the
OFF button on the touchscreen, near the
blower buttons.
Rear Climate Control Description And
Functions
Rear Climate Touchscreen (If Equipped)
Rear Climate Buttons (If Equipped)
Rear Comfort And Convenience Display Screen (If Equipped)
The rear climate controls are located on rear of the front
center console, or if equipped, on the Rear Comfort And
Convenience Display screen located at the front of the
rear center console.
The rear Climate Control system has floor air outlets at the
right and left sides of the second and third row seats.
There are also airflow outlets on the B-pillars in the second
row seating area, as well as the side trim panels in the
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
third row seating area. The system provides heated or
cooled air through the floor outlets, and dehumidified air
through the B-pillar and side trim panel outlets.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left and right
sides of the rear passenger zones can be adjusted sepa-
rately from the front or rear climate control displays.
AUTO BUTTON
Push the AUTO button below the rear climate
control display, or if equipped, press and
release the AUTO button on the Rear Comfort
And Convenience Display touchscreen to
control the rear passenger area’s temperature by
automatically adjusting distribution and amount of airflow.
Performing this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes
Ú page 69.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Push the Up or Down buttons near the rear climate control
display, or if equipped, press the Up or Down arrow
buttons on the Rear Comfort And Convenience Display
touchscreen to control the rear passenger’s temperature.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left and right
sides of the rear passenger zones can be adjusted sepa-
rately.
Push the Up arrow hard button, or press and
release, or slide the temperature bar on the
touchscreen towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the Down arrow hard button, or press and
release, or slide the temperature bar on the
touchscreen towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control
system. There are several blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using
the blower control buttons near the rear climate control
display, or if equipped, on the Rear Comfort And
Convenience Display touchscreen.
Use the blower button with the down arrow, or small
blower icon on the touchscreen to reduce the blower
setting. Use the blower button with the up arrow, or the
large blower icon on the touchscreen to increase the
blower setting.
NOTE:
Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the
numbered blower speed on the touchscreen bar area
between the blower icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Pushing the Mode button below the rear
climate control display, located on the rear of
the center console, will cycle through the three
rear mode control options for airflow
distribution. These options are: Face, Face/Feet, and
Feet.
Mode Control From The Rear Comfort And Convenience
Display
If equipped with the Rear Comfort And Convenience
display, two airflow distribution modes can be selected
on/off from the display by individually by pressing the
icons on the touchscreen for up to three combinations of
airflow. The icons on the screen will illuminate when
selected, and turn off when deselected.
The two airflow modes are:
Face (panel outlets)
Feet (floor outlets)
NOTE:
If Auto is selected, these icons will no longer be available
and the current mode selection will be overwritten.
REAR CLIMATE LOCK
When the rear climate controls are locked from
the front climate controls, “Unlock Rear” will
illuminate on the rear climate screen. No
adjustments to the rear climate system can be
made from the rear climate controls while the system is
locked.
When the controls are then unlocked from the front
climate controls, the text on the rear screen will update to
“Lock Rear”, and no longer be illuminated. Temperature,
blower speed, and mode settings can now be made from
the rear climate controls.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
To turn the rear climate controls off, push the
OFF button below the rear climate control
display, or if equipped, press and release the
OFF button on the Rear Comfort And
Convenience Display touchscreen, near the blower
buttons.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front climate control
display, and the word “AUTO” will illuminate along
with two temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automatically
regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and rear
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve, and automatically
maintain, that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by
changing the front blower setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front climate control
display will no longer be illuminated when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the presence of
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be
manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead (If
vehicle is equipped with climate control).
Push the VR/Phone button . After the beep, say one of
the following commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Climate Control system
through an intake grille, located in the right side trim
panel behind the third row seats. The heater outlets are
located in the right side trim panel, just behind the rear
doors. Do not block or place objects directly in front of
the inlet grille or heater outlets. The electrical system
could overload causing damage to the blower motor.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 347.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer is a heating element located
at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions are
met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with
full defrost,
and when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F
(0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient
temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When Remote Start is activated and the
outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C) the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote
Start will resume its previous operation. If the Wind-
shield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and opera-
tion will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower on
high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging starts
to occur, move the control
to (Mix Mode).
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
The glove compartment also has a lock cylinder that can
be locked/unlocked with the emergency key (located
inside the key fob) Ú page 18.
NOTE:
When valet parking your vehicle, remove the emergency
key from the key fob, as it will open the safe.
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
To open the lower storage compartment, push the release
button and lift up.
Lower Storage Compartment Release Button
To open the upper storage compartment, pull the sliding
tab backwards to slide the door open.
Upper Storage Compartment Sliding Tab
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage
compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the
chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on
the door to close.
From the fully closed position, push the chrome pad on the
door once to fully open the sunglasses bin.
From the fully open position, raise the door back up 3/4 of
the way and release to achieve the conversation mirror
position.
NOTE:
From the conversation mirror position, do not pull the door
fully open because it will damage the door. The door must
be put back in the closed position before fully opening it.
Sunglasses Bin Door
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
Rear Center Console
To open the upper storage compartment, pull the sliding
tab rearward to slide the compartment door open.
Upper Storage Sliding Tab
To open the lower storage compartment, pull the release
handle and lift upward.
Lower Storage Release Handle
Phone Storage — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with two pockets, located at
the front edge of the media bin, that can hold mobile
phones.
Phone Holder Location
1 — Rear Comfort And Convenience Display
2 — Console Cupholders
3 — Upper Storage Compartment
4 — USB Ports
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders or
devices with cords routing through upper storage area.
Damage may occur to upper console lid and device
cables when upper storage compartment is lifted
forward.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
CENTER CONSOLE COOLER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a console cooler
located in the front center console.
Center Console Cooler Button
Press the cooler button once to turn on the cooler. The
LED will illuminate.
Press the button a second time to turn the cooler off. The
LED will turn off.
CENTER CONSOLE SAFE — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience..
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
safe to store your valuables. The safe is
located inside of the front center
console
There is a keypad on the safe that consists of six buttons.
The first five buttons have numbers you can select to
create the lock code, while the sixth button is the Door
Open button.
Center Console Safe
The safe can be used as locked or unlocked storage.
The color of the keypad indicates the lock mode of the
safe:
White: Unlocked
Red: Locked
Pink: Lock code programming mode
To open the safe while it is in the unlocked
mode, simply press the Door Open button on
the keypad.
You can program a lock code by performing the following
procedure:
1. Press and hold the Door Open button for two
seconds. The keypad will flash pink, and then turn
solid pink.
2. Using the keypad, enter a 6-digit code. The keypad
will flash red, and then turn solid red.
3. Close the lid of the safe, and the safe will lock.
To open the locked safe, use the keypad to enter the
previously programmed 6-digit code, and then press the
Door Open button. After pressing the Door Open button,
the keypad turns white briefly to open the safe door.
Open Center Console Safe
The keypad will then turn red again, and return to the
locked mode when the safe lid is closed.
NOTE:
The keypad will flash red if an incorrect lock code is
entered. If the incorrect code is entered ten times in a row,
the user will be locked out from further attempts for
approximately 30 minutes.
1 — Emergency Override Location
2 — Keypad
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To revert the safe back to the unlocked mode:
1. Enter the programmed 6-digit code.
2. Press and hold the Door Open button for two
seconds. The keypad will flash red and change to
pink.
3. Enter the 6-digit code and press the Door Open
button. The keypad will flash white.
Once this procedure is completed, the safe will no longer
lock when the lid is closed.
Lock Code Override
If you forget the 6-digit code, there is a way to override the
code, using the emergency key stored inside your key fob:
1. Remove the emergency key from the key fob
Ú
page 18.
2. Use the emergency key to open the safe door.
3. Press and hold the reset button, located under the lid,
for two seconds.
Reset Button Location
The safe will return to the unlocked mode.
NOTE:
When valet parking your vehicle, remove the emergency
key from the key fob, as it will open the safe.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for the second row seating
windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and the
tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun
screens attach to when pulled up.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Continue
pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the
window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
USB/AUX CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
into one of the USB ports, located in the center stack of
the instrument panel.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will activate
Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if equipped.
Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® can also be activated
wirelessly. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and both
ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one port can
transfer data to the system at a time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port
and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a
message will appear and allow you to select which device
to use.
The following scenarios are listed as follows when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger
USB ports, and when a phone device is plugged into the
smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the
connection to a previous device to be lost.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Connecting AUX Or The External USB
Device
Use a connection cable to connect an external USB device
to the vehicle’s USB port, or use an auxiliary cable to
connect a device to the vehicle’s AUX port. These ports are
located below the climate controls.
Front Media Hub USB/AUX Ports
To the right of the front media hub is an HDMI port used
for the Passenger Display feature
Ú page 210.
For vehicles not equipped with the Passenger Display
feature, the front media hub configuration will appear
different.
Front Media Hub USB/AUX Ports — Without Passenger Display
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will begin
charging and is ready for use with the system. Type C and
Type A charge-only USB ports can be used at the same
time but cannot be used simultaneously while playing
media. When both Type C and Type A charge-only USB
ports are in use they will be charged at a reduced rate.
If equipped, your vehicle may have additional charge-only
USB ports in the center compartment.
Center Compartment USB Charge-Only Ports
NOTE:
If the device’s battery completely discharges, it may not
communicate with the Uconnect system until a minimum
charge is attained. Leaving the device connected to the
USB port may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using a USB cable to connect an external device:
The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, and provides the artist, track title, and album
information on the radio display.
1 — USB C Port
2 — USB A Port
3 — AUX Port
4 — HDMI Port (If Equipped)
1 — USB C Port
2 — USB A Port
3 — AUX Port
1 — USB C Port
2 — USB A Port
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information may
not be present on the radio display.
The device can be controlled using the radio buttons to
play, and browse the contents of the device.
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB port.
By using an auxiliary cable to connect an external device:
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system. The Uconnect system will not display informa-
tion related to the artist, track title, and album informa-
tion.
NOTE:
When using the AUX port, the external device cannot be
controlled using the radio buttons. The device will not
charge.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
Second And Third Row USB Ports —
If Equipped
If equipped, the second row USB ports can be used to
charge a device.
Rear Center Console USB Ports
If equipped, in the third rows, a set of two USB ports can
be used to charge a device. These ports are charge only.
Third Row USB Ports
Third Row USB Ports
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the charge only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are powered
when the ignition switch is in the ON position, while the
outlets labeled with a battery symbol are connected
directly to the battery and powered at all times.
1 — Type C Mini USB Ports (Charge Only)
2 — Type A Standard USB Ports (Charge Only)
1 — Type C USB Port (Charge Only)
2 — Type A USB Port (Charge Only)
1 — Type A USB Port
2 — Type C USB Port
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
(Continued)
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13 Amp)
at 12 Volt. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power rating is
exceeded the fuse protecting the system needs to be
replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel, below the
climate controls.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located on the rear of the front center console.
Front Center Console Power Outlet
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to battery
powered at all times by switching the fuse in the rear
power distribution center (PDC) from fuse location F44A to
F44B
Ú page 313.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded, the
power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
®
wireless
charging pad located inside of the storage area below the
climate controls. This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi
®
enabled mobile phone. Qi
®
is a
standard that allows wireless charging of your mobile
phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
®
wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi
®
wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
specialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please see
your phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a device.
Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error or foreign object is
detected.
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
All vehicle doors must be closed, and the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, for the wireless charging pad to
operate.
If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light to
illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up and
placed back on the charging pad to resume charging.
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone is
connected to a wired charger.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
iPhone
®
12 (including iPod
®
) is equipped with soft-
ware to protect the device from overheating. When the
software is active, the rate of charge is slowed down to
protect the device.
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging coils
of the system. Movement of the phone during charging
may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
Having multiple applications open on the phone while
charging will reduce the charging efficiency, and may
even shut down an application that is actively running
(i.e. Apple CarPlay
®
). This may also cause the phone to
overheat.
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods to
prevent the phone from overheating during charging
such as slowing down the rate of charge. In certain
instances, the device may shut down for a brief period
of time (when the device reaches a certain tempera-
ture). If this happens, it does not mean there is a fault
with the wireless charging pad. This may just be a
protective measure to prevent damage to the phone.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The power window controls, located on the driver's door
trim panel, operate the window movement for all four
power windows.
There is a single switch on the front passenger door and
rear passenger doors which operates the windows for only
that door.
Driver’s Door Power Window Switches
NOTE:
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in the
OFF position. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel
this feature.
The window controls will operate only when the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
Automatic Window Features
Both the driver and front passenger windows, and if
equipped, both rear windows, may have Auto-Down and
Auto-Up operations.
Auto-Down Feature
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, push the
window switch down to the second detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, lift the
window switch up to the second detent, and release; the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing
the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If
this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window may
need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
Front Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Rear Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Release the window switch, and within five seconds,
pull the window switch up again for an additional two
seconds.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
RADIO SIGNAL DEVICES ON
W
INDSHIELD — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with premium tint infrared
reflective glass (IRR). In the necessity of mounting devices
such as transponders, garage door openers, radar
detectors, or any other device that sends out a radio
signal, please refer to the allocated area on the
windshield. There is a small box located near the
passenger side of the mirror cover. The location is
identifiable by a slight discoloration in the glass due to the
removal of the IRR coating.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Metalized windshield coatings available on the Grand
Wagoneer can potentially disrupt RFID transmission/
reception depending on signal location or additional
interference, regardless of the provided deletion zone. In
the event that any RFID or signal interruption between a
vehicle mounted device (e.g. toll transponder) does not
function properly, you may need to consult with your toll
transponder company and may have to use an alternate
device such as a license plate attached toll transponder.
Radio Signal Device Mounting Location
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
TRI-PANE POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switches are located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition in the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops for the
sunroof open position: a comfort stop position and a full
open position. The comfort stop position will minimize
wind buffeting in the interior.
Express Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push OPEN on the sunroof switch
and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will
open to the comfort stop position and stop automatically.
Push and release OPEN again to continue to the full open
position.
To close the sunroof, push CLOSE on the sunroof switch
and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will
close automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold OPEN on the sunroof
switch. The sunroof will open to the comfort stop position,
then automatically stop. Release the switch then push and
hold again to continue to the full open position.
To close the sunroof, push and hold CLOSE on the sunroof
switch.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the sunroof movement in a partially open
position.
Express Venting The Sunroof
To vent the sunroof, push TILT on the vent switch and
release within one half second. The sunroof will open to
the vent position regardless of its initial position.
During Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express/
Manual Open or Vent operation is initiated, the sunshade
will automatically open to the half open position prior to
the sunroof opening.
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade
The sunshade has two programmed open positions: half
open and full open positions. When operating the
sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade will
always stop at the half open position regardless of express
or manual open operation. The switch must be pushed
again to continue on to full open position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot be
closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the
sunshade close switch when the sunroof is open/vented
and the sunshade is at half open position will first
automatically close the sunroof prior to the sunshade
closing.
Express Open/Close
To open the sunshade, push OPEN on the sunshade
switch and release it within one-half second, the
sunshade will open to the half open position and stop
automatically. Push and release OPEN again to continue
to open the sunshade to the full open position.
To close the sunshade, push CLOSE on the sunshade
switch and release it within one-half second.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the
sunshade in a partially open position.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunshade, push and hold OPEN on the
sunshade switch, the sunshade will open to the half open
position and stop automatically. Push and hold OPEN
again to continue to open the sunshade to the full open
position.
To close the sunshade, push and hold CLOSE on the
sunshade switch.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in motion will
stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Ignition Off Operation — If Equipped
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
NOTE:
If equipped with this setting, the Ignition Off timing is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Third Row Sunroof
The sunroof over the third row seating has a single fixed
glass pane with a manual sunshade. To open the
sunshade, pull the handle toward the front of the vehicle.
To close the sunshade, pull the handle toward the rear of
the vehicle.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge of
the hood with moderate force until the angle is below the
crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from its
own inertia.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the liftgate
button on the key fob, pushing the liftgate button in the
cargo area, or by pushing the electronic liftgate release
handle
Ú page 27.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is
open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a
second time will close the liftgate.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Liftgate Entry
NOTE:
If all doors are programmed to unlock on first press within
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187, all doors will unlock when
you push the electronic liftgate release. If only the driver’s
door is programmed, only the liftgate will unlock when you
push the electronic liftgate release.
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either front door trim
panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate.
The driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock
the liftgate.
The vehicle must be in PARK to utilize the liftgate open/
close button.
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by pushing the
electronic liftgate release handle and pulling upward in
one fluid motion.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the liftgate:
Manually (grab the liftgate closing handle and pull
downward)
Key fob
Hands-free (if equipped)
Liftgate close button in the cargo area
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry button, located to the
left of the electronic liftgate release handle, will lock the
vehicle only.
If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by
pushing the liftgate close button located in the cargo area
on the left rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the
liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate close button a
second time will reverse the liftgate operation.
Liftgate Close Button
ADJUSTABLE POWER LIFTGATE HEIGHT
The maximum height that the liftgate will open can be
adjusted and saved so that the liftgate will only open to the
desired height. To set a desired height, proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate fully, then manually pull down on
the liftgate to the desired height.
2. Push and hold the liftgate close button, located on
the left side trim panel inside the cargo area, for three
seconds. An audible chime will be heard to let you
know the height has been saved.
To reset the saved height setting to a new setting, proceed
as follows:
1. Open the liftgate, then manually push the liftgate
upward to its full open position.
2. Manually pull the liftgate down to the new desired
height and hold the liftgate close button for three
seconds until the audible chime is heard.
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate,
the liftgate can be released by accessing the service
release feature in the latch. This can be done using
a 3 mm diameter screwdriver.
Liftgate Service Release
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen. Place the
screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the lever
and release the latch.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activation,
use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle
activation zone in the general location between the park
sensors. The activation zone is about 1 ft (0.3 m) on each
side from the centerline of the vehicle. A sweeping motion
under the activation zone can also be used for hands-free
activation to open or close the liftgate.
NOTE:
The activation zone is the same for vehicles equipped with
or without a trailer tow package.
Valid Kicking Motion
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will
chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will open
after approximately one second, or close after
approximately three seconds. These settings can be
enabled or disabled through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
NOTE:
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the lift-
gate handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within
5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any kicks,
and will perform inhibit chimes to inform the user about
the missing key fob.
The distance from the rear fascia/bumper to the foot
shall be no more than 8 inches (20 cm) to be recog-
nized as a valid kick.
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system Ú page 187.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned off
during jacking, tire changing, manual car wash, and
vehicle service.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated by
any metallic object making a similar in-and-out motion
under the rear fascia/bumper, such as cleaning using
a metal broom.
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it is
opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed/open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
The Hands-Free Liftgate will not open with the key fob
in the cupholder or anywhere inside the vehicle.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the lift-
gate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open posi-
tion.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated manu-
ally.
The power liftgate will release, but not power open, in
temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time
(approximately one hour), the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation
or reverse its direction.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage
The load floor is designed for a maximum load of 300 lb
(136 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the
load floor.
Additional storage can be found under the storage lid. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Lift Load Floor Handle
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area sides,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving. The cargo tie downs are designed for a maximum
load of 300 lb (136 kg) per tie-down.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
(Continued)
Tie-Down Hooks
Foldable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.
Foldable Cargo Area Cover
To cover the cargo area:
1. Remove the folded cover from the storage pouch,
and unfold using a twisting motion.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
on each side of the pillar trim.
Step 2
3. Hook the straps to the inside post of the rear head
restraint on each side.
Step 3
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
WARNING!
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place.
To store the foldable cargo area cover, reverse the
installation steps and replace the cover into its storage
pouch.
Folding The Cargo Cover
Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grab the cover at the center handle and pull over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
Cargo Net — If Equipped
The rear cargo area may be equipped with a cargo net to
keep items secure while driving.
To attach the cargo net, the clips must be hooked through
the loops on both sides of the cargo area.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
The load must
not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed in the
rear cargo bin. Crossbars should always be used
whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
1 — Remove Cover From Vehicle
2 — Twist Cover
3 — Push Twisted Cover Inward
4 — Place Folded Cover In Pouch
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when
taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when
taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
INSTALLING THE CROSSBARS
There are two crossbars equipped with your vehicle. They
are located in the rear cargo bin, stored in foam blocks.
There is also a packet of fastener screws and a Torx
wrench provided in the foam blocks. You can find the
packet of fastener screws in the left foam block and the
Torx wrench in the right foam block.
Stowed Crossbars
There are three positions that the crossbars can be
installed in. There are also tie-down loops next to each
crossbar location on both sides of the roof.
Crossbar Locations
NOTE:
The crossbars should only be used in positions 1 and 2 or
positions 1 and 3. They are not designed to be used in
positions 2 and 3.
Crossbar and Tie Down Loop Locations
Crossbar Directional Arrow
NOTE:
There are arrows on top of the crossbars that indicate the
direction that they should be installed. The arrows should
point forward toward the front of the vehicle.
WARNING!
In a collision, loose crossbars in the vehicle could cause
injury. They could fly around in a sudden stop and strike
someone in the vehicle. Do not store the crossbars on
the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment.
Remove the crossbars from the vehicle when taken
from their mounting. Do not store them in the vehicle.
1 — Fastener Screws
2 — Torx Wrench
1 — Position 1
2 — Position 2
3 — Position 3
1 — Crossbar Installation Location
2 — Tie-Down Loop Locations
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To install the crossbars, refer to the following procedure:
1. Remove the crossbars from the foam blocks.
2. Swivel the outboard stanchion on the crossbar and
rotate it 180 degrees around the bolt to the open
position. Open the outboard stanchion on the
opposite end of the crossbar as well.
Step 2
Open Outboard Stanchion (Underside Shown)
3. Using the provided Torx wrench, loosen the Torx bolts
on both ends of the crossbar.
Step 3
4. Using the provided wrench and fasteners, bolt the
fasteners to the side rail.
Torque Wrench Indicator
NOTE:
An indicator on the wrench will show when the fastener is
tightened to the indicated torque specification. The
slanted line will line up with the arrow when torquing.
Step 4
5. Tighten down the Torx head bolts on the inboard
stanchion.
Step 5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
(Continued)
NOTE:
It is important that the screws are left loose until both
sides of the crossbar are secured to the rail.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 for the second crossbar in the
desired position.
Installed Crossbars
REMOVING THE CROSSBARS
To remove the crossbars, refer to the following procedure:
1. Using the provided Torx wrench, loosen the Torx
head bolts on the stanchion. Do this on both ends of
the crossbar.
Step 1
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Anything improperly secured to the roof rack,
crossbars, or the roof itself can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in collisions,
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying anything on your roof or roof
rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and appropriately secure the load
and any protective layer placed between the load
and the roof surface.
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and
thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal
area should be secured to both the front and rear of
the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
CAUTION!
2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Using the provided wrench, remove the bolts that
secure the crossbar to the roof rail. Repeat this on the
other end of the crossbar.
Bolt Location
3. Depress the swing key, and swivel the outboard
stanchion 180 degrees back to the stowed position.
Depress The Swing Key
Step 3
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for the second crossbar.
5. Place the crossbars back into the foam blocks in the
rear cargo storage bin.
WARNING!
In a collision, loose crossbars in the vehicle could cause
injury. They could fly around in a sudden stop and strike
someone in the vehicle. Do not store the crossbars on
the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment.
Remove the crossbars from the vehicle when taken
from their mounting. Do not store them in the vehicle.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
93
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows
engine coolant temperature.
Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfacto-
rily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
3. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side
of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illuminate
briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 308.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
3. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side
of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illuminate
briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Depending on your vehicles trim level, features and
options may vary.
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show how systems are
working and give you warnings when they are not. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 308.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1.
Up
Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll up-
ward through the main menu.
2.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the
OK button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
3.
MENU Button
Push the
MENU button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of the Home Screen
display. Push and hold the
OK button to enter edit
mode.
4.
Left Arrow Button
Push the
left arrow button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or submenu item.
5.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu.
6.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Display Options
Holding
OK will also allow you to change your display to
Digital or Analog.
Digital theme will be the default theme
Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press
OK to
reactivate
Speedometer must always be present
Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up info
will still be displayed in the main screen area (In this
case the speed moves to the top)
Custom Tile Configuration
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are able
to select up to five tiles to display information based on
your needs.
Press the
MENU button for the Home Screen display
Menu Button
Navigate Left or Right to highlight desired tile
Press
OK to select the tile and navigate to the selected
submenu and press
OK again to add your selection to
your tile view
The main menu options of the home screen are Driver
Info, Vehicle Info, Navigation — If Equipped, Audio, and
Off Road
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Arrow Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
6 — Right Arrow Button
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customizable Tile Layout
You can customize your Instrument Cluster Display with up
to five tiles that may consist of the following:
NOTE:
These options may vary based on your vehicle trim level.
Navigation
Map (Route Set / Route Not Set)
Trip A / Trip B
Vehicle Info
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Battery Voltage
Oil Life
Tire Pressure
Fuel Economy
Driver Info – If Equipped
Posted Speed Limit Sign
Driver Assist
Audio
Audio Info
Off Road – If Equipped
Selec-Terrain / Air Suspension Status
Steering Angle
Pitch
Roll
Trailer Tow – If Equipped
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake
• Trailer Tire Pressure
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Oil Level
The 3.0L engine does not have a
traditional “dipstick” and there is no
need to manually check the oil level
Ú page 299.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style and environmental conditions.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or
arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to
the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info”.
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the
OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
pop-up message of “To reset oil life engine must be
off with ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil Life
screen.
5. Push and release the
up or down arrow button
to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illumi-
nate in black under normal conditions, yellow for non
critical warnings and red for critical warnings
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus avail-
able, the position within the submenus is shown here
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time)
Air Suspension Status — If Equipped
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages and warning or information messages. These
pop-up messages fall into several categories:
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most
of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as
the condition that activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item.
Examples of this message type are “Right Front Turn
Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Exam-
ples of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn
signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the
vehicle with the lights on).
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the igni-
tion is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type
are “Remote Start Canceled - Door Ajar” and “Press
Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.
Messages include the following, but not limited to:
NOTE:
Certain messages may require dealer service.
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Oil Change Due ACC Override
Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Fuel Low Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled Service Anti-lock Brake System Service Shifter
Traction Control Off Service Electronic Throttle Control Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s)
Washer Fluid Low Service Power Steering Service Tire Pressure System
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the
up and
down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver
interactive display menu options until the desired menu is
reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may
vary.
Main Menu
DRIVER INFO
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Info icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the
left or right
arrow button to scroll through the information submenus.
Speedometer
Push and release the
OK button to toggle units (mph or
km/h) of the speedometer. Hold the
OK button to toggle
between Analog and Digital speedometer.
Night Vision — If Equipped
Arrow buttons and submenu indicators
disappear after five seconds of menu
navigation inactivity. Pedestrian/Animal icons
will be displayed in the top left location
Ú page 164.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist screen indicates the current status of
ACC, Active Lane Management and Active Driving Assist/
Assist+/Pilot
Ú page 235.
Oil Pressure Low Cruise Off Park Brake Engaged
Oil Level Low – If Equipped Cruise Ready Brake Fluid Low
Engine Temperature Hot Lights On Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Ignition or Accessory On Vehicle Not In Park Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Door Open Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
Service Air Bag System Service Air Bag Warning Light Door Open
Doors Open Hood Open Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
Liftgate Open Shift Not Allowed Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P Service Transmission
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
VEHICLE INFO
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the
left or right
arrow button to scroll through the information submenus.
Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Current Fuel Economy
Range To Empty
Press the
OK button to reset the average fuel economy
NOTE:
The Range feature is not able to be reset through the
instrument cluster display controls.
Gauge Summary
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Displays the current temperature of the coolant.
Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Battery Voltage
Displays the current voltage level of the battery.
Oil Life
Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.
Oil Level — If Equipped
Displays the current oil level of the vehicle
Ú page 299.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
If tire pressure is
OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the icon.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and the tire pres-
sure values in each corner of the icon with the pressure
value of the low tire are displayed in a different color
than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire Pressure is an information only function, and cannot
be reset
Ú page 240.
Stop/Start Status — If Equipped
Display current status of Stop/Start system.
TRIP
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Toggle the
left or right arrow button
to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display
the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or
Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the left or right arrow button until
the Navigation display icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
“Hold
OK to Start Route” will display when no active
route is set.
“Hold
OK to Cancel Route” will display when an active
route is set.
OFF ROAD
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Off Road Menu icon/title is highlighted. Push the
left or right arrow button to scroll the submenus.
Terrain Status
Selec-Terrain Status
Air Suspension Status
Vehicle Dynamics
Wheel Articulation
Transfer Case Status
Steering Angle
Pitch And Roll
Vehicle Pitch
Vehicle Roll
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TRAILER TOW — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left or
right arrow button to select Trailer Trip or Trailer Brake.
Trailer Trip will display the following:
Distance
NOTE:
Press and hold the
OK button to reset all the information.
Trailer Brake will display the following:
Output
Type
Gain
AUDIO
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This menu will display the
audio source information, including the Song name, Artist
name, and audio source with an accompanying graphic.
MESSAGES
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the
left or right arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope.
SETTINGS
NOTE:
If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will not
display while in the Settings menu.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Head Up Display (HUD),
feature settings are available at any vehicle speed
Ú page 103.
Screen Setup
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Settings Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on
the screen as needed. The Settings feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
Current Gear
On
Off
Odometer
Show
Hide
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the
OK button to
choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Restore
Cancel
Upper Left or Upper Right
None
Fuel Economy
Average
Compass
Outside Temp Trip A Distance Time
Range To Empty
(RTE)
Trip B Distance
Fuel Economy
Current
Trailer Trip
Favorite Menus
Driver info
Stored
Messages
Audio
(Show/Hide)
Trip Info
(Show/Hide)
Vehicle Info
Trailer Tow
(Show/Hide)
Off Road
(Show/Hide)
Navigation
(Show/Hide)
Settings
HUD
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
NOTE:
The HUD feature Settings are available
at any vehicle speed. Some infor-
mation like speed limit or Driver Assist
will not appear on the HUD unless your
vehicle is equipped Traffic Sign Assist
or Driver Assist systems.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Settings Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left
right arrow button until the HUD Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the
OK button to enter HUD. Use the up or
down arrow button to select a setting, then push and
release the
OK button to adjust the setting.
ON/OFF
HUD ON/OFF
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will display on
the windshield. When it is not selected, no display on
the windshield.
Content and Layout
Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
Standard Mode
When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD image is
split into thirds with the speed limit indicator shown to
the left, vehicle speed in the center, and turn-by-turn
navigation to the right.
Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management,
Active Driving Assist), Gear (only available in Sport
mode)
Advanced Mode
When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD displays
the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn navigation, speed limit,
driver assist function(s), and current gear.
Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management,
Active Driving Assist)
Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management, Active
Driving Assist), Gear (only available in Sport mode)
Display Height
Brightness
NOTE:
The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display Height and
Non Custom layouts), are controlled through the
Settings Screen in the Instrument Cluster
Ú page 96.
If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will not
display while in the Settings menu.
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 105.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of the charging
system. The charging system is still functioning prop-
erly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, over-
loaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping, etc.).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips, and if
the evaluation and driving pattern of the vehicle did not
help to identify the cause.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light —
If Equipped
The Drowsy Driver Detected (DDD) system,
monitors certain vehicle movement and driver
interactions to identify patterns suggesting
drowsiness. If detected, the system sends the
driver an auditory and visual signal to take precaution. A
pop-up will display continuously until the driver presses
the
OK button to clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until the
condition is no longer true
Ú page 228.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
Ú page 130.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 287.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning
Light — If Equipped
The Night Vision Animal Warning Light will
illuminate in red when an animal is detected
directly in the vehicle’s path, near the
headlights, and a collision is possible.
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up may
display when a detection occurs.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning
Light — If Equipped
The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light will
illuminate in red when a pedestrian is detected
directly in the vehicle’s path, near the
headlights, and a collision is possible.
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up may
display when a detection occurs.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle (keep engine running). If the
temperature does not return to normal after a few
minutes, turn off the engine and call for service.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position
and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if
the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 244.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a fault
detected in the air suspension system.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Drowsy Driver Detected (DDD) system is not
operating correctly and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Service Active Lane Management Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Active Lane Management system is not
operating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
Active Lane Management Warning Light —
If Equipped
The Active Lane Management Warning Light
will be solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning light
will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane
marker
Ú page 160.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime
will sound. The light will remain on until fuel is
added.
Fuel Cutoff Failure Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cutoff
failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an
authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low Ú page 300.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night Vision
Warning System has detected an animal
approaching in the vehicle’s path.
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light alerts the driver that the
Night Vision System has detected a pedestrian
approaching in the vehicle’s path.
Oil Level Sensor Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the engine oil level sensor. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault
with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
operating and needs service Ú page 134.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the FCW or PEB System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 238.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
previously, can reach higher temperatures than in
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as
dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoid-
ing sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs,
repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly
Ú page 240.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the tow hook. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels
Ú page 125.
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is actively adjusting the ride
height
Ú page 127.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Aerodynamic
setting
Ú page 127.
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light—
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle is
manually or automatically lowered from ride
height position downward for easy entry and
exit of the vehicle
Ú page 127.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Off-Road 1
setting
Ú page 127.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Off-Road 2
setting
Ú page 127.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will
illuminate If a fault is detected, it will be
indicated by a yellow ‘HOLD!’ indicator light that
will stay on as long as the fault condition exists.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Off
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
FCW or PEB is off
Ú page 238.
Maximum Payload Exceeded Indicator
Light
this light indicates that the maximum payload
may have been exceeded or load leveling
cannot be achieved at its current ride height.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD power
transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode and the
front and rear driveshafts are disengaged from
the powertrain.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when TOW/
HAUL mode is selected.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 134.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is not detected
Ú page 134.
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a complete
stop without you having to keep your foot on
the brake pedal. Once engaged a green
“HOLD” indicator will appear in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 134.
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
Ú page 55.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Active Lane Management indicator light
illuminates solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the system
is “armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 160.
Night Vision Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night Vision
Warning System status is Active
Ú page 164.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
Ú page 55.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active.
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
Ú page 131.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set
Ú page 134.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 132.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature is
turned on. The light will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the
transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and
the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When the Active Lane Management system is
ON, but not armed, the Active Lane
Management indicator light illuminates solid
white. This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is
detected, the system is ready to provide only visual
warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line
Ú page 160.
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear passenger
seats are unoccupied, and will illuminate in the
upper right portion of the instrument cluster
display, momentarily replacing the
configurable corner information.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Selec-Speed Control
is activated.
To activate Selec-Speed Control, ensure the vehicle is
4WD Low and push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed
Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass”
scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night Vision
Warning System status is Suppressed
Ú page 164.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be driveable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 187.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
3
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
115
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside
and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present,
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P)
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition will remain in the ON/RUN position until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument cluster
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
speed.
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed below
5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the ignition
will remain in the ON/RUN position. If vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark
Ú page 116.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has two positions: OFF, and RUN. To
change the ignition positions without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to return the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure is
detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
Ú page 93.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with placing
the vehicle in PARK (P) should the situations on the
following pages occur. It is a back-up system and should
not be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition is switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ON/RUN
position. After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF
automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch
OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift To
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is
blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The message “
AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both of
these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “
AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until
you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door is
closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK
by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display and
on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the Extended Park Starting procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and has not experienced an
extended park condition as defined previously, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there while the engine is cranking. This should
clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. The
starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds,
and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly
Ú
page 285.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
TURBOCHARGER “COOL DOWN” —
3.0L E
NGINE ONLY
The 3.0L engine is equipped with an after-run pump to
cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off.
Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo,
the pump will run for up to 20 minutes after the engine
has been shut off to circulate coolant through the
turbocharger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for
quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this
time.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is coiled and strapped right
behind the engine air cleaner filter assembly from the
manufacturer.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
An initial break-in period is recommended for the
powertrain (engine, transmission, axle, etc.) in your
vehicle. Adhering to the following guidelines will contribute
to improved longevity, fuel economy, and performance.
Drive moderately during the first 100 miles (160 km).
After that, for the first 500 miles (800 km), avoid long
periods at constant speed. Varying speed, engine RPM,
and throttle position is desirable.
Avoid high performance, severe off-road, and towing for
the first 500 miles (800 km).
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (km) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem. For engines not equipped with an oil
level sensor, please check your oil level frequently during
the break-in period. Add manufacturer-approved oil as
required
Ú page 354.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect settings.
The EPB switch is located on the instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel (below the headlamp switch).
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result. ONLY USE OILS THAT
ARE API APPROVED
Ú page 354.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
(Continued)
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once the parking
brake is fully engaged, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the parking brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF but the Brake
Warning Light will not illuminate, however, it can only be
released when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch is
held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released or
applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing
the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is placed in PARK. If your foot is on the brake
pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE,
the driver’s seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made
to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the
brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down momentarily.
You may hear a sound from the back of the vehicle while
the parking brake disengages. You may also notice a small
amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking
brake is fully disengaged, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always turn the ignition off,
secure the key fob, and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to a brake failure
and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The Brake Warning Light will
illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear
stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the
vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), the parking brake
will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system, a
yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This may be
accompanied by the Brake Warning Light flashing. In this
event, urgent service of the EPB system is required. Do not
rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the
transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is
enabled and disabled by customer selection through the
customer programmable features section of the Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 201.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed by
pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
transmission is placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of the
following conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or accel-
erator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver’s door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB
switch while the driver’s door is open. Once manually
bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle
reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the
OFF position and back to ON again.
Auto Hold — If Equipped
Auto Hold is a comfort feature that allows the driver to
remove their foot from the brake pedal once the vehicle
has come to a stop. The vehicle must be held at a
standstill for a predetermined amount of time by hydraulic
braking. The EPB will then engage and continue to hold
the vehicle at a stop until the driver applies the accelerator
pedal. Auto Hold can be activated or deactivated by
pushing the AUTO HOLD button located on the switch
bank.
AUTO HOLD Switch
The following conditions must be met for Auto Hold to
activate:
Driver’s door is closed
Driver's seat belt is fastened
Vehicle is at a standstill
Forward gear is selected
ACC is not engaged
EPB is not applied
ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto parking
maneuver is not activated
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle,
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be
sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
(Continued)
(Continued)
Brake Maintenance Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You
should only enter Brake Maintenance mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can only be done
after retracting the EPB actuator. Fortunately, actuator
retraction can be done easily by entering the Brake
Maintenance mode through the Uconnect Settings in your
vehicle. This menu-based system will guide you through
the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to
perform rear brake service.
Maintenance mode has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Maintenance mode, the EPB Warning Light will
flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have
the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N) if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
WARNING!
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P) before
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps
the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position (even though the engine will be
off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the
ignition is
OFF (not in ON/RUN position) before exiting the
vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The
transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above
the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving
at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once
(such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector
to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can be
made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control. Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Some
models will display both the selected gear limit, and the
actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Transmission Gear Selector
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE (D) when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case
is in a drive position.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK (P) if you must exit
the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 124. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
will improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing see
Ú page 181.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle see
Ú page 290.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is
warm. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may
not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates
the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest
available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE and ERS
mode is not active. For example, if you set the
transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the transmission
will not shift above FOURTH gear (except to prevent engine
overspeed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in
DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the “-” button
(on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the “-”
or “+” button will change the top available gear.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the “+” button
until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument
cluster.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
Select TOW/HAUL mode when driving in conditions such
as: driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy
load, etc. This mode will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
1 — Shift Up “+”
2 — Shift Down “–”
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
TOW/HAUL Switch
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
QUADRA-TRAC I OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only) transfer
case, which provides convenient full-time four-wheel drive.
No driver interaction is required. The Brake Traction
Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and
Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel that is
slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with
traction.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for conditions
where 4WD LOW range is recommended
Ú page 184.
QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the
normal driving 4WD HI mode. The Quadra-Trac II transfer
case provides three positions:
4WD HI
N (Neutral)
4WD LOW
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used for increased torque at the wheels.
Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking
can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to
swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control,
which may cause an accident possibly resulting in
personal injury or death.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
four-wheel drive system mode position, see the following
information:
4WD HI
This range is the default operating mode for daily use.
N (NEUTRAL)
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It
is used for towing your vehicle behind another vehicle
Ú page 181.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an
additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N), and push and
hold the 4WD LOW button once on the transfer case
switch until the 4WD LOW indicator light begins to flash in
the instrument cluster. The 4WD LOW light will remain on
solid when the shift is complete.
4WD LOW Button
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a message will
show on the instrument cluster display with instructions
required to complete the shift
Ú page 96.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N), and push the
4WD LOW button once on the transfer case switch until
the 4WD LOW indicator light begins to flash in the
instrument cluster. The 4WD LOW light will go out when
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a message
will show on the instrument cluster display with instruc-
tions required to complete the shift
Ú page 96.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph
(0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow the shift.
QUADRA-DRIVE II SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Drive II System features two torque transfer
couplings. The couplings include an Electronic Limited-Slip
Differential (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II transfer
case. The ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no
driver input to operate. Under normal driving conditions,
the unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque
evenly between left and right wheels. With a traction
difference between left and right wheels, the coupling will
sense a speed difference. As one wheel begins to spin
faster than the other, torque will automatically transfer
from the wheel that has less traction, to the wheel that has
traction. While the transfer case and axle coupling differ in
design, their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II
transfer case shifting information, preceding this section,
for shifting this system.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains. Tap the toggle up or
down to cycle through the positions.
Selec-Terrain
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:
ROCK (if equipped) – Off-road calibration is only avail-
able in 4WD LOW. The vehicle is raised (if equipped
with Air Suspension) for improved ground clearance.
Traction-based tuning with improved steerability for
use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for low
speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will
change to Off-Road 2 (OR2). If the Selec-Terrain switch
is in ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched
from 4WD LOW to 4WD HI, the Selec-Terrain system
will return to AUTO.
SAND/MUD (if equipped) – Off-road calibration for use
on low traction surfaces such as mud or sand. Driveline
is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on
less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls
are set to limit traction control management of throttle
and wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to Off-Road 1 (OR1).
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with
air suspension, the default ride height for SNOW is
Normal Ride Height (NRH).
AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel drive oper-
ation can be used on and off road. Balances traction
with seamless steering feel to provide improved
handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehi-
cles. If equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
SPORT – This mode alters the transmission's auto-
matic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds
are increased to make full use of available engine
power. Steering efforts are modified for sporty driving.
If equipped with air suspension, the level will change to
Aero Height.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 96.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system provides full-time
load leveling capability along with the benefit of vehicle
height adjustment by a toggle switch. The vehicle will
automatically raise and lower the ride height to adapt to
the appropriate driving conditions. At higher speeds, the
vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic ride height and when
operating in off-road modes (if equipped), the vehicle will
raise the ride height accordingly. The buttons near the
terrain switch in the center console area can be used to
set preferred ride height to match the appropriate
conditions.
1 — Selec-Terrain Positions
2 — Selec-Terrain Toggle
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
Quadra-Lift Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard posi-
tion of the suspension and is meant for normal driving.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
1.2 inches [30 mm]) – This is the primary position for
all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A smoother and
more comfortable ride will result. Push the toggle
switch forward once from the NRH position while the
vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the
OR1 + Sand Mode position, height will be maintained if
speed is below 59 mph (95 km/h) and then it will lower
to NRH. When in the OR1 position only, if the vehicle
speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and
50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the
vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle
will be automatically lowered to NRH
Ú page 184. OR1
is unavailable on 4x2 air suspension vehicles.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
2.0 inches [51 mm]) – This position is intended for
off-roading use only where maximum ground clearance
is required. To enter OR2, push the toggle switch
forward twice from the NRH position or once from the
OR1 position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automati-
cally lowered to OR1
Ú page 184. OR2 is unavailable
on 4x2 air suspension vehicles.
Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately
-0.6 inches [-15 mm]) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The
vehicle will automatically enter Aero Height when the
vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h)
and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds
or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
The vehicle will return to Default Ride Height from Aero
Height if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph
(48 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero Height, regard-
less of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in “SPORT” mode.
Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately
-1.6 inches [-40 mm]) – This position lowers the
vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as
lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and
unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Height, push the
toggle switch down twice from NRH while the vehicle
speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h). To exit Entry/Exit
Height, push the UP button once while in Entry/Exit
Height or drive the vehicle over 4 mph (6 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit Height
can be enabled through the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio.
If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the
gear selector is in PARK, the terrain switch is in AUTO, the
transfer case is in AUTO and the vehicle level is either in
Normal or Aero Height. The vehicle will not automatically
lower if the air suspension level is in OR2 or OR1. When
towing, the automatic Entry/Exit feature may be disabled
through the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio to prevent
vehicle and trailer movement when gear selector is moved
to PARK.
The Selec-Terrain system will automatically change the
vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the
Selec-Terrain switch. The height can be changed from the
default Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air
suspension buttons
Ú page 127.
The system requires that the engine be running for all
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened
at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not
be completed until the open door(s) is/are closed.
The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system uses a lifting and
lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from
incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then
the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move
down first and then the rear.
1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Light (Customer Selectable,
4x4 only)
2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Light (Customer Selectable,
4x4 only)
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Light (Customer
Selectable)
4 — Aero Height Indicator Light (Customer Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator Light (Customer
Selectable)
6 — Toggle Switch
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air
suspension system operates briefly; this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a
proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift Air
Suspension system has a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 187.
Default Ride Height:
Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the default
for all vehicle speeds and operation. This is the
selected height that the suspension will level for speed
changes (e.g. raising from Entry/Exit Height at speed,
lowering from Off Road Height at speed, etc.).
Default ride height can be changed by manually
adjusting the Quadra-Lift switch to Normal Ride Height
or Aero Ride Height and stay in the selected height for
2.5 seconds. It will be stored as the default ride height
and the height will be maintained until a new default
ride height is selected.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Uconnect Touchscreen Radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
done through the radio
Ú page 187.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling
to be disabled
Ú page 187. Tire/Jack mode is used for
connecting a trailer with a weight-distributing hitch
Ú page 172.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist with entering and exiting the vehicle, the air
suspension system has a feature which automatically
lowers the vehicle to Entry/Exit Height
Ú page 187.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running. When towing, the automatic Entry/Exit feature
may be disabled through the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio
to prevent vehicle and trailer movement when the gear
selector is moved to PARK.
Transport Mode
To assist with flatbed towing, the air suspension system
has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit
Height and disable the automatic load leveling system
Ú page 187.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows you to
only display suspension warnings instead of all
suspension messages (i.e., “Normal Height Achieved”)
Ú page 187.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
enabled which will move the vehicle to Normal Ride Height
and disable the air suspension during the alignment
Ú page 187.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
If equipped with a Uconnect Touchscreen Radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
done through the radio
Ú page 187.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 96.
OPERATION
The indicator lights 1 through 5 will illuminate to show the
current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lights will
show a position which the system is working to achieve.
When raising, if multiple indicator lights are flashing while
raising, the highest flashing indicator light is the position
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see an authorized
dealer for service.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if
multiple indicators are flashing while lowering the lowest
solid indicator light is the position the system is working to
achieve.
Toggle up once moves the suspension one position higher
from the current position, assuming all conditions are met
(i.e., engine running, speed below threshold, etc.). Toggle
up can be pushed multiple times. Each toggle up will raise
the requested level by one position up to a maximum
position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on
current conditions (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.).
Toggle down once moves the suspension one position
lower from the current level, assuming all conditions are
met (i.e., engine running, doors closed, speed below
threshold, etc.). Toggle down can be pushed multiple
times. Each toggle down will lower the requested level by
one position down to a minimum of Park mode or the
lowest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e.,
vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lights
and instrument cluster display messages will operate the
same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lights 1 through 5 will be
illuminated.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lights 2 through 5 will be
illuminated.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lights 3 through
5 will be illuminated.
Aero Height – Indicator lights 4 and 5 will be illumi-
nated.
Entry/Exit Height – Indicator light 5 will be illuminated.
Transport Mode – No indicator lights will be illumi-
nated. Driving or deselecting the mode in the Uconnect
system will disable Transport mode.
Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lights 1 and 5 will be illumi-
nated. Driving or deselecting the mode in the Uconnect
system will disable Tire/Jack mode.
Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lights 4 and 5 will be
illuminated. Driving or deselecting the mode in the
Uconnect system will disable Wheel Alignment mode.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full function-
ality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system is designed to provide
increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The power steering system adapts to
different driving conditions. If the electric power steering
system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
NOTE:
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System
Ú page 187.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER
STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST
OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed
within the instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for
service
Ú page 105.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer oper-
ational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme
steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an
over temperature condition in the electric power steering
system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let
the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and
message turn off.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing
the accelerator pedal will automatically restart the engine
Ú page 131.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty starter,
enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to
handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop
mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
“STOP/START READY” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
Ú page 96.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the
zero position, and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine-running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine
will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
Vehicle is in high altitude.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
4WD LOW is selected.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “STOP/
START OFF” message will appear in the instrument cluster
display and the Autostop mode will be disabled
Ú page 96.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM" message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 96.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles
NOT equipped with the Active Driving Assist
(ADA) system:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled, and functions as normal cruise control.
If ACC is not enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — On/Off
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set, a message “Cruise Control Set To MPH (KM/H)” will
appear indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator
light, along with set speed, will also appear and stay on in
the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing the
set speed from memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system can-
not maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go
too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always ensure the system
is OFF when you are not using it.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
position, will also erase the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently
Ú page 132.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
In vehicles
NOT equipped with the Active Driving Assist
system, Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected
Ú page 360.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop and
hold the vehicle in the stop position for approxi-
mately 10 minutes when following a vehicle
ahead. If the vehicle ahead does not start
moving within 10 minutes, the parking brake
will be activated, and the ACC system will be
canceled.
You should not utilize the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at
a constant speed.
WARNING!
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate
the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Driving Assist Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current
system settings for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Active
Lane Management (ALM), and the Active Driving Assist
(ADA) system. The information it displays depends on ACC,
ALM, and ADA system statuses.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button once
and the following will appear in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off”.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET”.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
When ESC Full Off mode is active
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off (If Equipped)
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) can be used
without ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC
and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “Driver Override” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) on/off
button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h)
when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button or press
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC system.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or SET (-)
button, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reen-
gage the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting appears in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster display will show the
ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the
system will adjust the vehicle speed automatically to
maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages
Ú page 136.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) engaged
and following a vehicle, the system will provide an
additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist
with passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and
will only be active when passing on the left side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will resume motion,
without any driver interaction, if the vehicle ahead starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
set speed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than two
seconds, the system will hold brake pressure for up to
10 minutes. If no driver action is taken after the
10 minutes, the Electric Park Brake will be applied and
the ACC system will cancel.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill (or the
vehicle is traveling below 3 mph (5 km/h), and the
driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the Electric Park Brake will be applied and the
ACC system will cancel.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning
will display and a chime will sound when conditions
temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display this message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning
is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
warning will display, and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
and the system will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
adverse weather conditions. The ACC system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected
at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If
this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer
brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes when
ACC is braking.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data when the
vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to detect
recognizable road signs such as:
Speed limits
School zones
No passing zones
NOTE:
The TSA system will automatically display the detected
road sign using the unit of measurement (mph or
km/h) selected within Uconnect Settings, or within the
instrument cluster display.
If no speed limit signs are detected, the system will
revert to the speed limit signs that are stored in the
Navigation system.
The system always checks the traffic signs indicating
the current speed limit. The system is able to recognize
and display up to two different road signs in the instru-
ment cluster display. These road signs can be found on
the Driver Assist page.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver Assistance
menu. System ON is signaled by road signs shown on the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will be
displayed when the driver selects it in the HOME screen.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that are
available through the Uconnect system Ú page 187.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the driver
when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds the
detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the
instrument cluster display.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will alert the
driver when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds the
detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the
instrument cluster display and by sounding an audible
alert. The audible alert will last for 10 seconds, and the
visual alert will remain on as long as the vehicle is
exceeding the speed limit.
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will not
show any traffic signs (unless selected in the HOME
screen, which will show detected speed limit signs), and
no alerts will be issued to the driver.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument cluster
display, and can display any combination of signs at one
time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and supplemental info,
and “Do Not Pass” signs) depending on what information
is available.
When a newly detected speed limit is higher than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with an
up arrow.
When a newly detected speed limit is lower than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with a
down arrow.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five seconds.
Traffic Signs Recognized
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed, along with a
newly detected speed limit, indicating special
circumstances of which the driver should be aware.
Available supplemental information includes:
School
Construction
Rain
Snow
Fog
NOTE:
Supplemental information will not be displayed when the
vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed speed
limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign on the
instrument cluster display will show a red outline to alert
the driver.
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental Information
(School Zone)
2 — Next Speed Limit Detected
3 — No Passing Zone Detected
CAUTION!
Functionality may be limited or the system may not
work if the sensor is obstructed.
The system may have limited operation or not work at
all in weather conditions such as heavy rain, hail, and
thick fog. Strong light contrasts can influence the
recognition capability of the sensor.
The area surrounding the sensor must not be
covered with stickers or any other object.
Do not tamper or perform any operations in the area
of the windshield glass directly surrounding the
sensor.
Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use specific
detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the
windshield.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and centers the
vehicle in the driving lane while traveling at speeds up to
90 mph (145 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system
limitations, see
Ú page 134.
NOTE:
The driver should always obey traffic laws and speed
limits. Never drive above applicable speed limit restric-
tions.
The driver can override ADA at any time by braking,
accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long as the
set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
is maintained. ADA will also keep your vehicle centered
between the lane lines, and monitor for other vehicles in
adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot Monitoring
sensors.
ADA uses sensors within the steering wheel to measure
driver attentiveness. ADA requires the driver’s hands on
the steering wheel at all times. The system will generally
aim to keep the vehicle centered in the lane, but when the
driver turns the steering wheel (e.g. to move farther away
from a large vehicle in an adjacent lane) the system will
reduce its control and enter "co-steering" mode. While in
co-steering mode, the system will provide reduced
assistance and allow the driver to control the path of the
vehicle. Once the driver stops providing input to the
steering wheel, the system will require a few seconds to
fully resume lane centering assistance, especially during
curves.
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST ON
O
R OFF
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
To enable the Active Driving Assist system, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button located
on the right side of the steering wheel. The steering
wheel image will display white in the instrument
cluster display until the system is engaged. If ACC
was previously disabled, pushing this button will
activate BOTH ACC and Active Driving Assist
systems.
2. If ACC was engaged before pushing the ADA on/off
button, ACC will remain active and ADA will also
become engaged (once all other conditions are met).
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the ADA on/off
button, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button
and release when the desired driving speed is shown
in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road traffic, weather conditions, vehicle
speed, distance to the vehicle ahead, position in the
lane compared to other vehicles, and brake operation
to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist system:
When driving in complex driving situations (e.g.
urban environments, construction zones, etc.),
adverse weather or low visibility conditions (e.g. rain,
snow, fog, sleet, dust), or adverse road conditions
(e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane markings,
etc.).
When entering a highway off-ramp, when driving on
roads that are icy, snow covered, or slippery.
When driving during difficult or uncertain conditions.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by pushing
the Distance Increase or Distance Decrease buttons.
When all system conditions are met as described in
“System Engagement Conditions” in the next section, the
system will engage and the steering wheel image in the
display will change to green.
Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
NOTE:
Along with the color change of the steering wheel image,
the “glow” effect of the instrument cluster display will also
change to green when ADA is engaged.
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met before the system
will engage:
Active Driving Assist system is enabled
Driver seat belt is buckled
Driver is not pressing the brake pedal
Driver door is open
Vehicle is at allowable ride height
System detects visible lane markings
Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
Vehicle is centered in lane
Turn signal is not activated
Vehicle is not in a tight curve
Trailer is not connected
Driver has hands on steering wheel
NOTE:
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the steering
wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the outside. Gripping
the inside areas of the steering wheel will not satisfy the
hands-on condition to engage the system.
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the following
situations:
If the system has detected driver inattentiveness, and
has gone through all escalation warnings
If lane markings are no longer detected
If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is deacti-
vated
If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in the blind
spot zone on the same side the turn signal is being
applied)
If the driver applies enough input to the steering wheel
If the driver’s seat belt is released
If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h)
If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is pushed
again (ADA will turn off)
If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking
NOTE:
ADA will not enable if the system detects a trailer is
connected to the vehicle.
Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button will turn
the system off. All other deactivation conditions will
place the system back into the “enabled” state with the
steering wheel indicator displayed in white until all
engagement conditions are met again.
When the system is deactivated, the system status
indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane Management
will return to its previous state, and ACC will disable.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
(Continued)
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The Active Driving Assist system status can always be
viewed in the instrument cluster display, and status
changes are shown by changes in color of the system’s
indicator lights.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as previously
described
Ú page 143, the system status indicator lights
will change from green, to yellow, to red, while the steering
wheel icon on the display moves up the screen to the
center. The following indicators will change in color as
warnings to the driver escalate:
Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel icon in
the instrument cluster display)
Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
If driver’s hands are not returned to the steering wheel,
the system will deactivate.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off
ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the system
is not actively providing steering and providing speed
control for to the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
The system detects driver is attentive and is actively
steering and providing speed control for the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
Driver inattentiveness has been detected, warning the
driver to place hands on the steering wheel.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red
Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, or driver
take-over is being requested, warning the driver to
place hands on the steering wheel. This warning is also
issued when the system has detected a tight curve and
is warning the driver to take control
NOTE:
The driver
MUST place hands on the steering wheel and
take control of the vehicle when the system is deactivated.
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message
SYSTEM STATUS
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights (green,
yellow, and red), the system can also issue a steering
wheel vibration to accompany these warnings. The
vibration warning (if enabled) will occur if the vehicle
crosses a lane marker, for example, when driving on a
tight curve. This feature can be turned on or off within the
Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
SYSTEM OPERATION/LIMITATIONS
WARNING!
Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver Assist
feature, requiring driver attention at all times. To
prevent serious injury or death:
Always remember that the Active Driving Assist
system is a convenience system that cannot accu-
rately detect all situations. Complete attention is
always required while driving, even when using the
Active Driving Assist system.
Always remain alert and be ready to take control of
the vehicle in the event that the Active Driving Assist
system deactivates, or otherwise lacks full function-
ality as described further before and after this state-
ment.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Active Driving Assist system DOES NOT:
Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles, slower
vehicles, construction zones or equipment, pedes-
trians, or animals
Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
Change lanes or turn
React to cross traffic
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component of ADA.
For ACC system limitations Ú page 134.
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited or
reduced functionality when one of the following conditions
occur:
The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the vehicle
is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the suspension,
installing different sized wheels or tires)
Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the windshield
replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and
the front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be automatically
applied and released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with
an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking function
by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense switch. The
driver can also override automatic braking by changing
the gear or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in
4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
Always keep your eyes on the road and hands on the
steering wheel when the Active Driving Assist system
is activated.
Do not use a hand-held device when the Active
Driving Assist system is engaged.
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles and pay
attention to traffic conditions. The Active Driving
Assist system will not steer to avoid safety hazards,
constructions zones, objects, or road impediments.
You need to take control to steer and brake the
vehicle in such situations, and when merging into
traffic, exiting the highway, making a turn for
crossing traffic, or stopping for traffic control devices.
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel (e.g.
steering wheel covers) which could interfere with the
hand detection sensors.
WARNING!
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and recommendations, see
Ú page 152.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display
warning will appear in the instrument cluster display if the
vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed exceeds 7 mph
(11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
front sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front
fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with ParkSense Active Park
Assist, there will be six ParkSense sensors located in the
rear fascia/bumper.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to the
vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, and the vehicle is stationary.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system Ú page 187.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 96. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch located on the switch
panel on the forward part of the center console,
in front of the gear selector.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to enable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the system
state.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately two
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will be
displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display a pop-up. The pop-up will include up to two faults.
Possible fault messages are "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED.” The pop-up message will display for
five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" pop-up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with
"UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE posi-
tion and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Side Distance Warning system detects the presence
of side obstacles near the vehicle using the parking
sensors located in the front and rear fascias/bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed if
this feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal and,
when enabled, with visual indications on the instrument
cluster display.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE, the Side Distance Warning
volume/chime will match the Front ParkSense volume
and chime type.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Park-
Sense.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Rear ParkSense
volume and chime type.
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when
the system is sounding an audible tone. An audible tone
will only sound if a collision is possible.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short distance
and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 7 mph (0 and
11 km/h). The system can be activated/deactivated via
the Settings menu of the Uconnect system. If the
ParkSense System is deactivated via the ParkSense hard
switch then the Side Distance Warning system will
automatically be deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the case of
a failure of the Side Distance Warning system sensors.
Free the bumpers of any obstacles, ensure that the front
and rear fascia/bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt
and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
“System Not Available” — This message is displayed if the
Side Distance Warning system is not available. The failed
operation of the system might be due to the insufficient
voltage from the battery or other failures on the electrical
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the electrical system checked.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the message to appear
in the instrument cluster display will read “PARKSENSE
OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle
the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may inter-
fere with the correct operation of the parking sensors.
Before using the ParkSense system, it is recom-
mended to remove the removable tow hook ball
assembly and any attachments from the vehicle when
it is not used for towing operations.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12 – 24 inches
(30 – 60 cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous
Fast audible
chime as the
objects get close
to the vehicle
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking
maneuvers. The system works by identifying a proper
parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and
controlling the steering wheel only, or the accelerator,
gear selector, brakes, and the steering wheel (if equipped
with the Fully Automated system). Depending on the
driver's parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle
into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on either
side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
Two types of ParkSense Active Park Assist systems are
available:
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist
ParkSense Automated Parking system
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist —
If Equipped
The Semi-Automatic system detects parking spaces, and
controls the steering wheel only. The driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes.
ParkSense Automated Parking — If Equipped
The Fully Automated system detects parking spaces, and
controls the accelerator, gear selector, brakes, and
steering wheel. In this mode, the system also provides
obstacle detection by providing visual and audible
warnings and automatic braking to avoid a collision.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Fully Automated
system, you can switch between Semi-Automatic and Fully
Automated mode in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
The system is designed to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
During a Semi-Automatic or Fully Automated
maneuver, if the driver touches the steering wheel
after being instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver
will be required to manually complete the parking
maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environ-
mental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that
will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and
performs accurately. This is due to the system’s
dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature. The system will also continuously
perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for
differences such as over or under inflated tires and
new tires.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Park-
Sense.
WARNING!
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can
be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch
panel on the forward part of the center console,
in front of the gear selector.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns
on). Pushing the switch a second time will disable the
system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed
Vehicle speed is greater than 28 mph (45 km/h) when
searching for a parking space during a Fully Automated
maneuver
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space during a Semi-Automatic
maneuver
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
Semi-Automatic active steering guidance into the
parking space
Steering wheel is touched during Fully Automated or
Semi-Automatic active steering guidance into the
parking space
The gas pedal or brake pedal is pressed during Fully
Automated active steering guidance into the parking
space
ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch is pushed
Any of the doors are opened during a Fully Automated
maneuver
The driver door is opened during a Semi-Automatic
maneuver
Rear liftgate is opened
A trailer is connected
Vehicle is in 4WD Low
Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, or Active
Driving Assist systems are engaged
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System
intervention
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within the maximum
amount of shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE
Ignition is in the RUN position
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated
All of the doors are closed
Rear liftgate is closed
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h) during a
Semi-Automatic maneuver
Vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) during a
Fully Automated maneuver
The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction
NOTE:
During a Semi-Automatic maneuver, if the vehicle is
driven above approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
must then reactivate the system by pushing the Park-
Sense Active Park Assist switch.
During a Fully Automated maneuver, if the vehicle is
driven above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately
28 mph (45 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
must then reactivate the system by pushing the Park-
Sense Active Park Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily. If any of the previously
described conditions are not present, then the LED will
turn off.
If the vehicle is in any other gear than DRIVE, and an
objected is detected in the vehicle’s path, the system will
default to Parallel Park Exit. A prompt will appear in the
Uconnect display, and the driver will need to select “Yes”
or “No” for a Parallel Park Exit maneuver. Any other
conditions will result in a default to a Parallel Parking
maneuver.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
PARKSENSE AUTOMATED PARKING —
I
F EQUIPPED
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the driver must press “Park” on the Uconnect display, and
the system will begin searching for valid parallel and
perpendicular parking spaces.
NOTE:
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full screen
image in the Uconnect display. If the driver shifts to
REVERSE while searching for a parking space, a
camera image will appear in the Uconnect display with
a “Shift To Drive” message.
Both types of valid spaces (parallel and perpendicular) will
be displayed in the Uconnect display as they are found.
The available spaces will update in real time.
When valid parking spaces have been found, the driver
will be prompted to stop the vehicle.
Select A Space
The driver can then select a parking space by pressing the
desired space on the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
If a space selection is attempted before the vehicle is
stopped, a warning screen will appear in the Uconnect
display with instructions to stop the vehicle to make a
selection.
If the driver selects a perpendicular parking space, the
system will prompt the driver to choose a Forward or
Reverse parking method.
Choose Perpendicular Parking Method
NOTE:
You can press the “Back” button on the display to return
to the parking space selection screen and select a
different space.
Once the parallel or perpendicular parking maneuver
selection has been made, a message will appear in the
display with instructions to hold down the brake pedal and
Active Park Assist switch. Both of these conditions must
be met in order to begin the parking maneuver. The
message also instructs the driver to push and hold the
Active Park Assist switch for the entire maneuver.
NOTE:
When the Active Park Assist switch is held down, the turn
signal for the side of the vehicle where the selected
parking space is located will turn on automatically.
The system will then instruct the driver to remove hands
from the steering wheel and feet from the pedals. This
screen will be shown for a minimum of two seconds, or
until the driver releases the brake pedal.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking sequence is initiated by the driver after
the previously described conditions are met, the Uconnect
system will display a Top View along with either a rear
camera view (if the vehicle is placed in REVERSE) or a
forward camera view (if the vehicle is placed in DRIVE).
The Top View will have integrated ParkSense arcs in the
image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
The system will then perform the parking maneuver. Once
the maneuver is complete, the vehicle will automatically
shift into PARK.
The system will display a “Complete!” message and
instruct the driver to release the Active Park Assist switch.
Once the Active Park Assist switch is released, a chime will
sound and the LED on the switch will turn off. After
approximately five seconds, the previous Uconnect screen
will display.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop
the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings
and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 28 mph (40 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space. The system
will provide a warning to the driver at 28 mph (40 km/h)
that tells them to slow down. The driver is then respon-
sible for completing the maneuver if the system is
canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Parallel Park Exit
Enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system by
pressing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. To
initiate a parking space exit maneuver, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the driver must press “Exit” on the
Uconnect display.
After the driver chooses a parallel park exit maneuver, the
system will then prompt the driver to choose an exit
method. The exit method options are Forward Left and
Forward Right.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehi-
cles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also,
the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
Choose Exit Method
NOTE:
If an exit method selection is attempted before the vehicle
is stopped, the driver will be instructed to stop the vehicle
to make a selection.
After the driver chooses a parallel exit side, a message
appears in the Uconnect display with instructions to hold
the brake pedal and hold down the Active Park Assist
switch. Both of these conditions must be met before the
maneuver can begin.
When the Active Park Assist switch is held down, the turn
signal for the chosen exit side will turn on automatically.
The system will then instruct the driver to remove hands
from the steering wheel and feet from the pedals. This
screen will be shown for a minimum of two seconds, or
until the driver releases the brake pedal.
When the exit sequence is initiated by the driver after the
previously described conditions are met, the Uconnect
system will display a Top View along with either a rear
camera view (if the vehicle is placed in REVERSE) or a
forward camera view (if the vehicle is placed in DRIVE),
and the exit maneuver will begin.
The Top View will have integrated ParkSense arcs in the
image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
The automatic maneuver ends when the vehicle is clear of
the parking space, and the display shows the message of
a completed maneuver. The vehicle will be in DRIVE and
held hydraulically by the brakes until the driver presses
the accelerator pedal. The system gives vehicle control
back to the driver.
Once the driver regains control of the vehicle, a chime will
sound and the LED on the switch will turn off. After
approximately five seconds, the previous Uconnect screen
will display.
Parking Maneuver Paused/Canceled
Certain conditions can pause or cancel a Fully Automated
park or exit maneuver.
The ParkSense Automated Parking system can be paused
due to the driver’s finger being removed from the Active
Park Assist switch and/or an object in the vehicle’s path
during a parking maneuver.
If one or more of these scenarios occur, automatic braking
will bring the vehicle to a stop and hold the vehicle
hydraulically by the brakes.
The driver will be instructed to hold the Active Park Assist
switch to continue the park or exit maneuver. If the driver
does not resume holding the switch down, the maneuver
will cancel.
If the maneuver is paused due to an object in the vehicle’s
path, a message will appear in the Uconnect display. The
maneuver will remain paused until the object is no longer
in the vehicle’s path.
The system can also be paused before the Active Park
Assist switch is held down if the driver shifts into
REVERSE.
The driver will be instructed to shift to DRIVE to continue
the maneuver. If the vehicle is shifted into DRIVE, the
process will continue on to the seek/maneuver selection
phase.
SEMI-AUTOMATIC PARKSENSE ACTIVE
P
ARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the driver must press “Park” on the Uconnect display, and
the system will begin searching for valid parallel and
perpendicular parking spaces.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Fully Automated system,
you may have to update your selected setting in the
Uconnect system to switch to a Semi-Automatic maneuver
Ú page 187.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full screen
image in the Uconnect display. If the driver shifts to
REVERSE while searching for a parking space, a
camera image will appear in the Uconnect display with
a “Shift To Drive” message.
Both types of valid spaces (parallel and perpendicular) will
be displayed in the Uconnect display as they are found.
The available spaces will update in real time.
When valid parking spaces have been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular or
parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
A chime will sound, and the driver will be instructed to stop
the vehicle and to select a space. This can be done by
pressing the desired space on the Uconnect display.
Select A Space
If the driver selects a perpendicular parking space, the
system will prompt the driver to choose a Forward or
Reverse parking method.
Choose Perpendicular Parking Method
After a parking space has been selected, the driver will be
instructed to remove hands from the steering wheel and
shift into REVERSE.
Remove Hands From Wheel And Shift To Reverse
Once active steering begins, a camera image will appear
in the Uconnect display with instructions that will display
for the duration of the maneuver.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for steering
to complete before then instructing to check the vehicle’s
surroundings, and move backward.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
(Continued)
Move Backward
Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE) while
keeping hands off of the steering wheel will be instructed
to the driver while checking the vehicle’s surroundings
before completing the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneuver
is complete and the driver will be instructed to check the
vehicle's parking position, then shift the vehicle into PARK.
The message “Complete! Check Parking Position” will be
displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop
the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings
and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the Semi-Automatic parking
maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within eight
shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument
cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space. The system
will provide a warning to the driver at 15 mph (25 km/h)
that tells them to slow down. The driver is then respon-
sible for completing the maneuver if the system is
canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehi-
cles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also,
the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
WARNING!
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
Parallel Park Exit
Enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system by
pressing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. To
initiate a parking space exit maneuver, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the driver must press “Exit” on the
Uconnect display.
After the driver chooses a parallel park exit maneuver, the
system will then prompt the driver to choose an exit
method. The exit method options are Forward Left and
Forward Right.
Choose Exit Method
After an exit maneuver method has been selected, the
driver will be instructed to remove hands from the steering
wheel and shift into REVERSE.
Remove Hands From Wheel And Shift To Reverse
Release the steering wheel and use the brake and
accelerator pedals and gear selector as instructed, while
the system handles the steering automatically for exiting
the parking space. If the driver touches or holds the
steering wheel (voluntarily or not) during the exit
maneuver, the maneuver will be interrupted.
The Semi-Automatic maneuver ends when the display
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the end
of the maneuver, the system gives vehicle control back to
the driver.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT OPERATION
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a
forward facing camera to detect lane markings or road
edges and to measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent lanes while the
driver is preparing to change lanes.
The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
When both lane markings are detected, and the vehicle
approaches (or crosses) the lane marking with no turn
signal applied, and the blind spot zone is not occupied, the
ALM system provides warnings to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries. These warnings
include a visual warning in the instrument cluster along
with steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings).
If the driver crosses the lane marking, the system will
either guide the vehicle back to the center of the lane,
provide a vibration in the steering wheel, or both,
depending on radio settings.
When both lane markings are detected, and the driver
uses the turn signal to indicate a lane change, and a
vehicle is detected in the BSM zone on that side of the
vehicle, the ALM system provides a warning in the form of
steering assist and/or steering vibration (depending on
radio settings) to guide the vehicle back to the center of
the lane.
NOTE:
The system will suppress visual warnings, steering
vibration (if selected in radio settings), and steering
assistance (if selected in radio settings) when the
driver activates the turn signal, the blind spot zone is
clear of vehicles, and a lane change is occurring.
If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects a
vehicle in the adjacent lane, and the turn signal is
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
applied in that direction, the BSM LED on the mirror will
flash. If the driver continues to attempt the lane
change, steering wheel torque will be provided to keep
the vehicle within its lane markings.
The driver may manually override the steering assist
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any
time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
Active Lane Management system provides a visual
warning in the instrument cluster, as well as a steering
assist torque (if configured in Uconnect Settings), to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to drift out of the lane, the system
provides a flashing visual warning through the instrument
cluster display as well as a haptic steering wheel vibration
(if configured in Uconnect Settings) when the vehicle
crosses the lane boundary.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Active
Lane Management system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible
and visual warning to the driver if removed. The system
will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the
wheel.
TURNING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
O
N OR OFF
The Active Lane Management button is located
on the switch panel on the forward part of the
center console, in front of the gear selector.
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane Management
button (LED turns off). A message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the system off, push the button again (LED turns
on).
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT WARNING
M
ESSAGE
The Active Lane Management system will indicate the
current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
When the system is on, the lane lines are gray when both
of the lane boundaries have not been detected.
System On (Gray Lines)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the system is on and only the left lane marking
has been detected, and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
vibration and/or steering assist warning in the steering
wheel if a lane departure occurs, the left lane line will
be green.
When the system senses the lane line has been
approached (but not crossed), the left lane line will
change to solid yellow and the system will provide
steering assist torque (if programmed in Uconnect
Settings).
When the system senses the lane line is being crossed,
the left lane line will change to flashing yellow, and the
system will provide haptic steering wheel vibration (if
programmed in Uconnect Settings).
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the system is on, the lane lines turn from gray to
green to indicate that both of the lane markings have
been detected. When both lane markings have been
detected, the system is ready to provide visual warn-
ings in the instrument cluster display and a vibration
and/or steering assist warning in the steering wheel if
a lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
When the system senses a lane drift situation, the left
lane line turns solid yellow. At this time, steering assist
warning is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
When the system senses the lane line is being crossed,
the left lane line changes from solid yellow to flashing
yellow (on/off). At this time, vibration is applied to the
steering wheel.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle begins to
depart the lane at the same time the Blind Spot Moni-
toring (BSM) system detects another vehicle in the
BSM zones, the system will provide haptic steering
wheel vibration and/or steering assist torque (if
programmed in Uconnect Settings).
CHANGING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
S
TATUS
Configurable settings for the Active Lane Management
system are available within the Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
Selectable Warning Types:
Vibration Only
Steering Assist Only
Vibration And Steering Assist
Other configurable settings for this system are for the
intensity of the vibration (high/med/low), steering assist
strength (hi/med/low), and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/medium/late).
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
NOTE:
The system will not apply vibration and/or steering
assist to the steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision Warning,
etc.).
The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced on
when the ALM system is enabled.
The ALM system will be suppressed when the Active
Driving Assist system (if equipped) is engaged.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
1. Press the Vehicle button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display and then select the Controls
menu.
2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the Rear View
Camera system on.
NOTE:
The Rear View camera can also be turned on manually
through the Apps menu within the Uconnect system.
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears. When the vehicle is shifted out
of REVERSE with camera delay turned on, the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the following conditions occur: the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position,
or the touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
Rear View Camera is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Rear Camera Washer
When the rear window washer is activated by pushing the
windshield wiper/washer lever forward, the rear Back Up
and digital rearview mirror (if equipped) cameras are also
washed. For more information, see
Ú page 62.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector
position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view
to the standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the
Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds
are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
VIEWING AT SPEED
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or
DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be activated
with the Back Up Camera button in the Controls
menu. This feature allows the customer to
monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or trailer, if
equipped) for up to 10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle
speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View
Camera image will be displayed continuously until
deactivated via the touchscreen X button.
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The FamCam system consists of an interior monitoring
camera mounted on the headliner that allows the driver to
view cargo/passengers in the rear interior of the vehicle
through the Uconnect screen.
To activate the feature, press the FamCam
button in the Controls tab of the Vehicle menu.
The FamCam feature can also be accessed
from the App Drawer, or the status bar at the
top of the Uconnect display.
The display will show the entire view inside the vehicle on
the left side of the screen, and will show a zoomed-in view
of the selected seat on the right side of the screen.
FamCam Display Example (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
To change the seat shown in the zoomed-in view, press a
different seat location on the left side of the display. The
zoomed-in view will then show the new seat location. By
default, the second row driver’s side seat will be displayed
in the zoomed-in view.
The display will appear in color in well lit conditions and
will appear black and white in low light conditions.
If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the
touchscreen X button, the view will close. Otherwise, the
FamCam view will remain on the display.
NOTE:
When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in the
zoomed-in view on the right side of the display will be
retained. The next time the feature is activated, the same
seat will be shown in the zoomed-in view.
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Night Vision Camera
system which uses an infrared camera to view the area
ahead of the vehicle, beyond the headlights, to detect
people and large animals when it is dark outside.
The system detects pedestrians or large animals by
measuring the temperature difference between the object
and the surrounding area.
The thermal objects detected by the camera can be
displayed in the instrument cluster display. Scroll to the
Night Vision page in the instrument cluster display menu
Ú page 100 to display the Night Vision screen.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
Warm objects (e.g. animals) will appear lighter on the
display while cold objects (e.g. traffic signs) will appear
darker.
NOTE:
Night Vision only shows objects of interest that are
warmer or colder than the surroundings.
Adjust the instrument cluster dimmer control bright-
ness to make the image appear brighter or dimmer.
To exit out of the Night Vision screen, select a different
menu in the instrument cluster display.
A yellow or red border and box highlight will appear around
objects of interest. More than one object of interest may
be highlighted.
Highlight Around Objects Of Interest
The highlighting of the object(s) of interest will update in
real time based upon the current Night Vision
assessment.
The Night Vision system display can be deactivated under
certain conditions. See
Ú page 167 for further
information.
The two categories of Night Vision warnings are
Pedestrian Warnings and Animal Warnings.
Pedestrian Warning Telltale
Animal Warning Telltale
A Pedestrian or Animal Warning is considered either Level
1 or Level 2. Level 1 warnings are yellow, and Level 2
warnings are red. The colors are not configurable.
Level 1 Warnings:
Yellow telltale in the instrument cluster display
Yellow highlights around the detected pedestrian/
animal
Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds greater
than 8 mph (13 km/h) and the target is in or
approaching the vehicle path
Level 2 Warnings:
Red telltale in the instrument cluster display
Red highlights around the detected pedestrian/animal
Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds greater
than 8 mph (13 km/h) and a collision with the detected
pedestrian/animal is possible
The pedestrian/animal is directly in the vehicle path,
close to the headlight area
A video pop-up will display when there is a target
detected and the instrument cluster display is not
showing the Night Vision page
A chime will sound for a Level 2 Warning detection
event
Only one telltale can be displayed at a time based upon
priority.
The priority order of the warnings from highest to lowest is:
1. Pedestrian Warning Level 2
2. Animal Warning Level 2
3. Pedestrian Warning Level 1
4. Animal Warning Level 1
Level 2 Warnings may display in the Head Up Display
(if equipped).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is stopped, or slowing down, all Level 2
warnings become Level 1 warnings.
You can enable or disable the warnings within the
Uconnect system Ú page 187.
If the warnings are off, the telltales, chimes, and warning
messages will all be off. Pedestrians and animals can still
be detected by the system, but there will be no warnings.
The Night Vision alert status telltale will be gray
when the warnings are suppressed. The telltale
will also turn gray to indicate that the alerts are
suppressed due to environmental factors (e.g.
daylight hours, external temperature is greater than 86°F
(30°C)) or if the gear selector is in REVERSE. When the
Night Vision alerts are active, the telltale will be green
Ú page 105.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Camera Washers
When the front window washer is activated, the Night
Vision camera will also be washed
Ú page 61.
DETECTION RANGE
The system can detect people 4 ft (1.25 m) tall or greater
in the upright position. The system can also detect
animals that are four-legged and 3 ft (1 m) tall or greater
in the upright position.
The detection distance for the system is between 26 ft
(8 m) and 328 ft (100 m) from the front of the vehicle.
The system may not be able to detect pedestrians or
animals in the following situations:
Pedestrian/animal is outside of the detection range
Pedestrian/animal is fully or partially covered
Pedestrian/animal does not reach the minimum detec-
tion height
NOTE:
Other objects on the road that meet the height/shape/
temperature (e.g. sun exposure) of pedestrians/animals
may be detected and classified as targets.
SERVICE THE NIGHT VISION SYSTEM
When service conditions are present, the following fault
messages may appear in the instrument cluster display
when the vehicle is placed in the ON position.
If "Night Vision Unavailable Sensor Blocked" appears in
the instrument cluster display, make sure the camera is
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other debris. The camera is
located in the upper fascia/bumper, inside the driver side
grille slot. Clean the camera using a soft wet cloth or by
pressing the Clean Camera button in the Uconnect
system. If the message continues to appear after cycling
the ignition, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to a
warning.
Never attempt to swerve around animals if doing so
would endanger you or others.
Do not stare at the image while driving. You could
crash and you or others could be injured.
The Night Vision system only provides alerts to
objects of interest and cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment. The warnings are
meant to direct your attention to the detected
objects, but the Night Vision system does not auto-
matically brake the vehicle and may not provide a
warning with enough time to help avoid a crash.
Warnings are only provided if a pedestrian or large
animal is detected by the system.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive
of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle
speed, distance to the vehicle ahead, and most
importantly, brake operation, to ensure safe opera-
tion of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Night Vision can only detect pedestrians and animals
located within the range of the infrared camera.
Night Vision may not detect pedestrians or animals
and highlight them if:
They are not in an upright position, for example
if they are sitting or lying down, or if the pedes-
trian is riding a bicycle
The figure in the display appears incomplete, for
example because the pedestrian or animal is
partially behind a vehicle
The pedestrian/animal is not directly ahead in
the coverage area
The pedestrian/animal is part of a group
The pedestrian is wearing certain types of
clothing
The pedestrian/animal is moving too quickly
through the field of view
The sensor is blocked by dirt, rain, snow, or ice
WARNING!
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
If “Night Vision Temporarily Unavailable” or “Night Vision
Unavailable Service Required" appears in the instrument
cluster display after cycling the ignition, see an authorized
dealer.
The camera must be properly aligned to work correctly. If
the camera needs adjustment, see an authorized dealer.
Do not attempt to adjust the camera yourself.
NOTE:
Alignment and performance of the Night Vision may be
affected by aftermarket modifications. Mopar® parts
should be used to get the optimal performance of this
system.
NIGHT VISION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The Night Vision display is deactivated under the following
conditions:
Vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
The ignition is not in the ON/RUN position
The headlights are off and the vehicle speed is greater
than 8 mph (13 km/h)
The Night Vision display warnings are suppressed under
the following conditions:
Daylight hours
Temperatures above 86°F (30°C)
The system may not be fully functional in the following
situations:
On steep hills
On tight curves of the road
If the camera/sensor is damaged or blocked by dirt,
snow, ice, or other debris
In poor visibility conditions such as heavy fog, rain,
snow, or other weather conditions
If the vehicle has been modified with aftermarket parts
and/or accessories
NOTE:
If any of these conditions are present, the system does not
need service.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different view is
selected through the touchscreen buttons. The Top View
of the vehicle will show which doors are open. The image
will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top
of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
The Surround View Camera system is comprised of four
sequential cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate
and side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 187.
Press this button on the touchscreen to enter
the Surround View Camera menu in the
Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear View
or Top View is the default view of the system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a
touchscreen X button to disable the display of the camera
image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the Surround View Camera mode is
exited and the last known screen appears again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the side
view mirrors and its projected back up path based on the
steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button
located in the Controls menu within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with Rear
View or Front View in a split screen display. There is
integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front, rear,
and if equipped, the sides of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding to the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
may appear distorted.
Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors and/or liftgate will cancel outside
image.
Top View Plus Rear View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the Top View
of the vehicle with optional active guidelines for
the projected path when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
The Rear Cross Path button will give the driver
a wider angle view of the rear camera system.
The Top View will be disabled when this is
selected.
Top View Plus Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
The Front Cross Path button will give the driver
a wider angle view of the front camera system.
The Top View will be disabled when this is
selected.
Back Up Camera View
The Back Up Camera button will provide a full
screen rear view with Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through the
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear View
screen will return to the Surround View Camera menu. If
the Back Up Camera was manually activated through the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the
display screen will return to the Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and the
touchscreen X button is pressed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 187.
Camera Washers
When the rear window washer is activated, the rear Back
Up and digital rearview mirror (if equipped) cameras are
also washed
Ú page 62.
When the front window washer is activated, the front
cameras will also be washed
Ú page 61.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using
the Surround View Camera. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and
the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
upper left of the display screen, the image will
zoom in to two times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the
view to the standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the
Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds
are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door near the center to unlatch.
Then use a finger to rotate the door to the full open
position.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
around the perimeter of the fuel door to break the
ice buildup.
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside
the pipe seal the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while
refueling.
NOTE:
Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the
flapper doors to open.
Fuel Filler
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only
be used as a parking aid. The Surround View camera
is unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using Surround View.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Engage the fuel door latch by pushing on the outer
edge near the center.
NOTE:
For further information on fuel requirements see
Ú page 351.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable weight
a vehicle can carry, including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability, do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR or GAWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axles.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
NOTE:
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
Air suspension vehicle may limit off-road heights if
loaded beyond recommended values for vehicle GVWR
and GAWR.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
Ú page 170.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 170.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the
trailer sway.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight-distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT — QUADRA-LIFT AIR SUSPEN-
SION EQUIPPED VEHICLES
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the Normal Ride Height.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the RUN position with all doors
closed while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air
suspension system.
2. Position the vehicle on a level surface in preparation
to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
3. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, use the touchscreen radio settings to
enable Tire/Jack mode. Tire/Jack mode will be
canceled and the procedure must be restarted if the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 5 mph (8 km/h).
When towing, the automatic Entry/Exit feature may
be disabled through the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio
to prevent vehicle and trailer movement when gear
selector is moved to PARK.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
5. Attach the loaded trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height H2.
7. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the front
fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about
1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 above Normal
Ride Height [H1]).
8. Use the touchscreen radio settings and switch off
Tire/Jack mode. Make sure the vehicle returns to
Normal Ride Height. Perform a visual inspection of
the trailer and weight-distributing hitch to confirm the
manufacturers’ recommendations have been met.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
9. The vehicle can now be driven.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
TOW/HAUL mode engaged (if equipped).
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT — NON-AIR SUSPENSION
EQUIPPED VEHICLES
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride height.
2. Position the vehicle on a level surface in preparation
to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
3. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
4. Attach the loaded trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
5. Ensure the trailer is properly secured to the hitch,
including the safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake
controls.
6. Cautiously drive the vehicle and trailer at 20-25 mph
(30-40 km/h) for approximately 3 miles (5 km) to
re-level the suspension.
7. Park the vehicle and trailer on a level surface.
8. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height H2.
9. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the front
fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about
1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 above normal
ride height [H1]).
10. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight-distributing hitch to confirm the manufac-
turers’ recommendations have been met.
11. The vehicle can now be driven.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
TOW/HAUL mode engaged (if equipped).
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Model Engine Wheel Base (in) Axle Ratio GCWR Frontal Area Max GTW Max TW
Wagoneer 4x2 3.0L SO 130 3.55 12,300 lb (5,579 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,990 lb (2,717 kg) 599 lb (272 kg)
Wagoneer 4x4 3.0L SO 130 3.55 12,300 lb (5,579 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,750 lb (2,608 kg) 575 lb (261 kg)
Wagoneer 4x2 3.0L SO 130 3.92 16,500 lb (7,484 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) 1,000 lb (454 kg)
Wagoneer 4x4
(Max Tow)
3.0L SO 130 3.92 16,500 lb (7,484 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) 1,000 lb (454 kg)
Grand Wagoneer 4x4 3.0L HO 130 3.92 12,300 lb (5,579 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,400 lb (2,449 kg) 540 lb (245 kg)
Grand Wagoneer 4x4
(Max Tow)
3.0L HO 130 3.92 16,500 lb (7,484 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 9,650 lb (4,377 kg) 965 lb (437 kg)
4x2 Series 3 5.7L 123 3.21 13,700 lb (6,214 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,400 lb (3,356 kg) 740 lb (335 kg)
4x2 Series 3 5.7L 123 3.92 15,000 lb (6,803 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) 1,000 lb (454 kg)
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
4x2 Series 2 5.7L 123 3.21 15,000 lb (6,803 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,790 lb (3,987 kg) 879 lb (398 kg)
4x2 Series 2 5.7L 123 3.92 16,600 lb (7,529 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) 1,000 lb (454 kg)
4x4 Series 1 5.7L 123 3.21 13,700 lb (6,214 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,180 lb (3,256 kg) 718 lb (325 kg)
4x4 Series 1 5.7L 123 3.92 15,000 lb (6,803 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,480 lb (3,846 kg) 848 lb (386 kg)
4x4 Series 2 5.7L 123 3.21 13,700 lb (6,214 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,170 lb (3,252 kg) 717 lb (325 kg)
4x4 Series 2 5.7L 123 3.92 16,600 lb (7,529 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) 1,000 lb (454 kg)
4x4 Series 3 5.7L 123 3.21 13,700 lb (6,214 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,170 lb (3,252 kg) 717 lb (325 kg)
4x4 Series 3 5.7L 123 3.92 15,000 lb (6,803 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,470 lb (3,841 kg) 847 lb (384 kg)
Wagoneer 4x2 3.0L SO 123 3.55 12,300 lb (5,579 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,130 lb (2,781 kg) 613 lb (278 kg)
Wagoneer 4x4 3.0L SO 123 3.55 12,300 lb (5,579 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,980 lb (2,713 kg) 598 lb (271 kg)
Wagoneer 4x2 & 4x4
(Max Tow)
3.0L SO 123 3.92 16,500 lb (7,484 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) 1,000 lb (454 kg)
Grand Wagoneer 4x4 6.4L 123 3.92 15,000 lb (6,803 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,370 lb (3,797 kg) 837 lb (380 kg)
Grand Wagoneer 4x4
(Max Tow)
6.4L 123 3.92 16,600 lb (7,529 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 9,930 lb (4,504 kg) 993 lb (450 kg)
Grand Wagoneer 4x4 3.0L HO 123 3.92 12,300 lb (5,579 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,620 lb (2,563 kg) 562 lb (255 kg)
Grand Wagoneer 4x4
(Max Tow)
3.0L HO 123 3.92 16,500 lb (7,484 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 9,880 lb (4,482 kg) 988 lb (448 kg)
Model Engine Wheel Base (in) Axle Ratio GCWR Frontal Area Max GTW Max TW
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
R
EMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver
cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch
receiver. This cover is located at the bottom center of the
rear fascia/bumper.
1. Turn the three locking retainers located at the
bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull bottom of the hitch
receiver cover outward (towards you).
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you)
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at the
top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure in
reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs and fully seat the hitch receiver
cover in the fascia/bumper prior to installation of the
quarter turn fasteners.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
(Continued)
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled
Servicing
Ú page 293. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full-size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information
Ú page 331.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can
occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK
(P). For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance.
When towing, you should allow for additional space
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. The controller is
located below the instrument panel on the right side of the
steering column.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with electric
trailer brakes and EOH systems. Some previous EOH
systems may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer's electric brakes independent of the
tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control lever is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the
two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding
the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN
setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the ITBM, the
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for
the specific towing condition and should be changed as
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free environment
at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly
adjusted. See a trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer manufacturer's
instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
the trailer connected message should appear in the
instrument cluster display (if the connection is not
recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the
correct type of trailer must be selected from the
instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the “Trailer Brake
Type” appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears
on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h)
and squeeze the manual brake control lever
completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer,
trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the
maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined
in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer
Ú page 96.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems. To deter-
mine the type of brakes on your trailer and the avail-
ability of controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause
damage to the electrical system and electronic
modules of the vehicle. See an authorized dealer if an
aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into the vehicle's electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing up
the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic. If
equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, the automatic
Entry/Exit feature may be disabled through the Uconnect
Touchscreen Radio to prevent vehicle and trailer
movement when gear selector is moved to PARK.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions, will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
build-up. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck
Ú page 127. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific straps (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions
may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension,
ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake. Shift the transmission
into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing,
to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD LOW Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models With
4WD LOW Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA-TRAC I (SINGLE-SPEED
T
RANSFER CASE) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
M
ODELS
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not
have a N (Neutral) position in the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA–TRAC II/QUADRA–DRIVE II
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral) and the
transmission must be in PARK (P) for recreational towing.
The N (Neutral) selection button is located by the selector
switch.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension,
ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and
must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are
no longer met during the shift, then the N (Neutral)
indicator light will flash continuously until all
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previous
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any four-wheel drive vehicle.
Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either
ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
trailer).
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer
case.
The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into N (Neutral)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previous
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
requirements are met or until the N (Neutral)
button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, the engine should be started and left
running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the
doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This
process allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for tempera-
ture effects.
Engaging/disengaging of the Electric Park Brake
requires the ignition to be in the ON/RUN position.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for five seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will begin to blink red,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is
complete. A “4WD Neutral Warning Vehicle May Move
Even in Park” message will appear in the instrument
cluster.
N (Neutral) Button
6. After the shift is completed and the N (Neutral) light
stays on, release the N (Neutral) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in N
(Neutral), push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
button until the engine turns off. Ensure vehicle is in
RUN position with the engine off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK.
Release the brake pedal.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the Electric Park Brake. Ensure vehicle is in
RUN position with the engine off.
15. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice (without
pressing the brake pedal), to turn the ignition to the
off position.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Start the engine.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and
must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are
no longer met during the shift, the N (Neutral) indi-
cator light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the N (Neutral) button is
released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for two seconds.
N (Neutral) Button
7. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off, release
the N (Neutral) button. After the N (Neutral) button
has been released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine off.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the Electric Park Brake.
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE,
release the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They
are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest
useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle
or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be
raised as required by the changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec-Terrain
switch position. The vehicle height can be changed from
the default height for each Selec-Terrain mode by normal
use of the air suspension switches
Ú page 125.
When To Use 4WD LOW — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where
additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle
speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided
when in 4WD LOW.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches
(51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or streams. To
maintain optimal performance of your vehicle's heating
and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the
system into recirculation mode during water fording.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD LOW on dry pavement; driveline
damage may result. 4WD LOW locks front and rear
drivelines together and does not allow for differential
action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving in
4WD LOW on pavement will cause driveline binding;
use only on wet or slippery surfaces.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off),
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid
depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 24 inches
(60 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to ensure the fluids have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in
appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as
possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary
Ú page 125. Only shift into a lower gear to maintain
forward motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions
at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing
a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and
shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly down the hill, allowing
the compression braking of the engine to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the
tires.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill. Always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and will usually provide traction to
complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent
Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy
braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed
Control use the following procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling
the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL
using only the brake.
4
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty
conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
187
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 10.1-inch Display or Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch
Display system, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
dealer immediately,
Ú page 356, or refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the customer programmable
features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s faceplate
for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted media devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab on
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
Press the Open/Close button on the Front Comfort And
Convenience Display to access the fold-out screen.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
Display
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Italiano, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or
km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km,
or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Message Pop-Ups Displayed with Button Press This setting will turn message notifications on or off.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
Entertainment Screens
My Profile
When the Entertainment Screens button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s Entertainment system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Passenger Screen Permissions
This setting will enable or disable Passenger Screen Permissions. The options within this
setting are “Navigation”, “Device Manager”, and “Uconnect Theater” all with “On” and
“Off” options.
Rear Seat Screen Permissions
This setting will enable or disable your Rear Seat Screen Permissions. “On” and “Off”
options are found within “Navigation”.
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Italiano, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for
more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or
km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km,
or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Message Pop-ups Displayed with Button Press This setting will turn message notifications on or off.
System Text Size
This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”, “Large”, or “Taller”.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
Off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. An available option is “Hey
Uconnect”.
Voice Barge-in
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off. For more information about
Voice Barge-in, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Ambient Color Personalization
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient lighting
color in the cabin.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut off.
The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Setting Name Description
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
Radio Off with Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time
is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are
“On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for further information.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings
This setting will open the submenu containing the audio settings
Ú page 205.
TomTom Traffic And Travel Services
This setting will turn TomTom Traffic And Travel Services (if equipped) on or off. An active
subscription is required for this feature to work.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending
on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options
related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an
audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will
provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert sounds.
The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the
possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal
when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off. This setting is
located in “Automatic Emergency Braking”.
Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will turn the Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration on or off.
Active Lane Management
This setting will alert the driver by vibrating the steering wheel and/or moving the steering
wheel, when a lane departure is detected. The available options within Active Lane
Management are Lane Management “Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and
“Vibration + Steering Assist”; Lane Warning “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”; Vibration
Strength “Low”, “Medium” and “High”; and Steering Assist Strength “Low”, “Medium”
and “High”.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The available
options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 MULTIMEDIA
Night Vision Video Warning
This setting will turn the Night Vision Video Warning and green/gray cluster indicator light
on or off.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Active ParkSense Mode
This setting will adjust the level of vehicle control when the Active ParkSense Mode is
active. The available settings are “Full Auto” and “Steering Only”
Active ParkSense Proximity Chime This setting will turn the Active ParkSense Proximity Chime on or off.
Side Distance Warning
This setting will adjust the warning for side distance. The available options are “Off”,
“Sound Only”, and “Sound & Display”.
Drowsy Driver Alert
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes,
indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default
This setting will change the Electric Power Steering mode. The available options are
“Comfort” for a lower effort steering experience, “Normal” for the standard effort steering
experience, and “Sport” for a higher effort steering experience.
Power Side Step
This setting will activate the Power Side Step. The “Auto” setting will lower the step when
the door is opened and retract it once the door is closed. The “Off” setting will deactivate
the feature.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Setting Name Description
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
MULTIMEDIA 195
Clock
New Speed Zone Indication
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has
changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Set Time
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can scroll
through the available days, months, and years.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off
This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All Settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
Phone Repetition This setting will turn the Phone Repetition function on or off.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
MULTIMEDIA 197
Voice
Navigation
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Primary Voice Assistant This setting allows you to choose your voice assistant between “Alexa” and “Uconnect”.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. An available option is “Hey
Uconnect”.
Voice Barge-In
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is
completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which icons
display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 MULTIMEDIA
Trailer
Camera
When the Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Current Trailer
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designations
can be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Name
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are
hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump,
equipment, flatbed, horse, gooseneck, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility,
and 5th wheel.
Braking
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are “Light
Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric Over Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric Over
Hydraulic”.
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
Mirrors & Wipers
Lights
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options are
“On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is
turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Ambient Color Personalization
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient lighting
color in the cabin.
Interior Ambient Lighting
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of the interior ambient lights. The
available options are “Level 1” through “Level 6”.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is unlocked. “Greeting Lights” must be selected and “Headlight
Illumination On Approach” must be selected above 0 seconds for the feature to be
enabled. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Proximity Wake-Up
Proximity detection is a system which activates specific interior and exterior lights as the
vehicle is approached with a valid key fob. This feature provides an increased sense of
welcome and security as the user enters the vehicle in the dark. This setting will turn the
Proximity Wake-Up on or off.
NOTE:
For the exterior lighting to be activated, “Headlight Illumination On Approach” must be set
to a value other than zero.
Greeting Lights
When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it enables “Headlight Illumination On
Approach”. When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is selected, it allows the
adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked
with the key fob. “Greeting Lights” must be selected and “Headlight Illumination On
Approach” must be selected above zero seconds for the feature to be enabled. The
available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn
signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant
side to improve visibility at night.
Setting Name Description
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
Brakes
Doors & Locks
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights With Suspension Lower
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Suspension Lowering
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the settings related to the vehicle’s Brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is selected, a
pop-up will display “Yes” and “No” options.
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The Auto Door
Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one
push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or
off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked
to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the power
liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Relock
This setting will lock the doors after 30 seconds of the doors remaining unlocked. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
Seats & Comfort
Key Off Options
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or the
vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout
This setting will activate the 3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout. Selectable options are “Off”,
“Lock On Ignition” and “Always Locked”.
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is set to
OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
Suspension
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut off.
The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time
is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Windows With Key Fob
This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is off. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower
This setting will allow you to sound the horn when the Suspension Lowering button is
pushed on the key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Suspension Lowering
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. The “All”
setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings Only” setting will only display
warning messages.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
Audio
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Auxiliary Modes
This setting will allow you to set the Auxiliary Suspension Mode. The available options are
“Off”, “Transport Mode”, and “Wheel Alignment Mode”. In Transport Mode, the vehicle
will not auto level when being transported by another vehicle. In Wheel Alignment Mode,
the vehicle will not auto level when a wheel alignment is being performed.
Setting Name Description
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started, if selected.
The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system
resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
Radio off With Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay”
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone,
Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
Media Expander This setting will allow you to turn the Media Expander setting “On” or “Off”.
Setting Name Description
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notifications Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages from any connected
phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls from any connected phone
on or off.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation pop-ups on or off.
Wireless Charger Status Popups This setting turns the Wireless Charger Status pop-up on or off.
Drive Mode Transition Popups This setting turns the Drive Mode Transition pop-up on or off.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts
This setting turns receiving notifications for SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts on or
off.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
SiriusXM® Setup
Accessibility — If Equipped
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays an option related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® Settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit
This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates
System Information
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options are “On”
and “Off”.
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
information about the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
licensing information of your radio.
Passenger License Information When this feature is selected, Passenger License Information is displayed.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear
personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection.
The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values from your vehicle.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio Preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track
on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing
the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Passenger Screen
located above the glove compartment on the passenger
side of the vehicle. From the Passenger Screen, you will be
able to access similar features seen within the Uconnect
radio, such as media functions, Rear Seat Entertainment
with Amazon FireTV Built-in, Navigation, and device
management.
Passenger Screen Location
To begin using the Passenger Screen, push the Power
button in the center stack, or press the Power button
under the Controls tab within the Uconnect system. The
Passenger Screen can be turned off by accessing the
Control screen and pressing the Power Off button.
You must link Bluetooth® headphones to the Passenger
Screen to begin listening to the system’s audio
Ú page 213.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will need to be turned On each
time the vehicle is started, and the system will display
the Home screen upon boot up.
Passenger Screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
PASSENGER SCREEN PERMISSIONS
Through the Uconnect system, features within the
Passenger Screen can be activated and deactivated
through Passenger Screen Permissions. To access
Permissions, press the Vehicle button in the Menu Bar and
select the Settings tab. Then, press the Passenger Screen
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
settings menu. Press the On button for the Passenger
Screen Permission setting to activate permissions.
Passenger Screen Permissions
By default, the Passenger Screen Permissions setting is
set to Off, and the driver will need to give permission for
the different features.
When Permissions is turned On, you can individually select
the permissions for the following:
Navigation
Device Manager
Driver Media
Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped
Passenger Screen Permissions can also be activated
through the Controls screen, under the Vehicle button in
the Menu Bar. If “Deny Passenger Screen Permissions” is
turned On, the setting will switch itself to Off.
HOME SCREEN
Passenger Screen Home Screen
When the Passenger Screen is started up and no other
media was running during the last ignition cycle, the Home
screen will display. Here, you can select from the features
of the Passenger Screen. On the left side of the screen,
you can access “Notifications and system Controls”.
The Notifications button (the bell) will take you to the
Notification screen, identical to what is seen in the main
radio.
You can cycle between the features by swiping left or right
on the touchscreen. When accessing a feature, press the
Home/Apps button on the left side to access the feature
view and select a different feature.
The available features are:
Audio
Video & Images
HDMI
Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped
Navigation
Devices
Cameras
Controls Screen
From the Controls Screen, you can adjust the daytime/
nighttime brightness of the screen, change headphone
volume, and power off the Passenger Screen.
To change the brightness, adjust the slider up or down, or
press the Up or Down Arrow button located next to the
slider. “Up” will increase brightness; “Down” will decrease
brightness. Daytime and nighttime brightness levels will
vary, and the adjustment maximum/minimum will differ
depending on the time of day.
To change the headphone volume, adjust the slider up or
down, or press the Up or Down Arrow button located next
to the slider. “Up” will increase the volume; “Down” will
decrease the volume.
1 — Home Screen Button
2 — Notification Button
3 — Controls Button
4 — Feature Cards
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Headphone volume can also be manually adjusted from
the headphones. Changing the headphone volume
manually will not reflect in the headphone volume slider
on the Passenger Screen.
If the Screen Off button is pressed, the Passenger Screen
will continue to operate, but the screen will go dark. Tap the
screen again to return to the display. While the screen is off,
audio will continue to play from the Passenger Screen.
The Power Off button will fully shut down the Passenger
Screen. No audio or video will play from it.
Passenger Screen Controls Screen
AUDIO AND VIDEO
Passenger Screen Audio Feature
Audio allows you to listen to your favorite radio station, a
connected USB device, or connected media device. You
can directly change the source on the Home screen by
pressing the Source button in the feature. You can also
expand it by pressing the Full Screen View button.
To change the media source, press the Source button and
then press on the desired source. The available sources
are:
Live Radio (FM, AM, SXM)
Bluetooth®
USB 1
USB 2
AUX
AV 1 — If Equipped
AV 2 — If Equipped
Rear Screen 1 Listen In — If Equipped
Rear Screen 2 Listen In — If Equipped
NOTE:
Audio devices connected via Bluetooth® must be done
through the Device Manager in the radio. For more
information on pairing a device, refer to your Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
If the driver is listening to “Live Radio”, the option will
not be available in the Passenger Screen. Select “Now
Playing On Radio” to listen to the currently playing
station. If the driver selects a radio station while the
Passenger Screen is playing live radio content, the feed
will end on the Passenger Screen and control will be
given to the Uconnect system.
On the Preset menu, you will be able to listen to saved
radio presets. Press the desired preset to begin listening.
The Browse tab will let you browse through different radio
stations or audio saved onto a USB or audio device. Press
“Browse” and select from the different folders. You can
scroll up and down to view the options within those
folders. Press on the desired radio station or audio track
to begin playing it.
When the USB source is selected, you can choose a video
file to play if saved to a USB device. Press “Browse” and
locate the folder with the video file. Press the video file
name, and it will begin to play on the Passenger Screen.
1 — Screen Off
2 — Brightness
3 — Pair/Unpair Headphones
4 — Headphone Volume
5 — Power Off
6 — Mute
1 — All Sources Tab
2 — Now Playing Tab
3 — Browse Tab
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
NOTE:
Not all video files will be supported from a USB. Certain
video files may require digital rights to view or play. These
may be unavailable for playback on the Passenger Screen.
Passenger Screen Radio Mode
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
A
MAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN —
I
F EQUIPPED
Rear Seat Entertainment will let you control and listen in
to the content being played on the rear entertainment
screens. You can view the contents of the rear screens,
lock the rear screens, change the source of the rear
screens, or turn the rear screens on or off
Ú page 216.
You can access the Headphone pairing screen for
Passenger Display by pressing the Headphone button of
the right side of the screen.
HDMI PROJECTING
HDMI lets you connect a device to the provided HDMI port,
using an HDMI cable, and project the device directly to the
Passenger Screen. To begin, plug a a device into the HDMI
port. Then, press the HDMI button on the touchscreen.
HDMI will continue to show the menu bar and Headphone
Paring button.
NOTE:
The HDMI Card will not automatically launch when a
new device is connected. The HDMI Card will show a
device connected, and the Card will need to be
pressed.
If the user disconnects a device from the HDMI port
while the HDMI Card is in full screen, the system will
close HDMI and reload the Home screen.
DEVICE MANAGER
Device Manager
Device Manager provides an easy place to view all the
devices connected to the Uconnect system and lets you
pair the Driver’s smartphone to the Uconnect system. You
will also pair Bluetooth® headphones to the Passenger
Screen from this screen.
For more information on pairing your smartphone, refer to
your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
1 — Source Buttons
2 — Now Playing Tab
3 — Search Button
4 — Radio Presets
5 — Related Button
6 — Seek Down Button
7 — Direct Tune Button
8 — Seek Up Button
9 — Replay Button
1 — Device Settings
2 — Phone Connection
3 — Media Connection
4 — Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto™ Connection
5 — Add Device
6 — Manage Headphones
7 — Do Not Disturb
8 — Two Active Phones
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
To pair a set of Bluetooth® Headphones:
1. If viewing Device Manager in full screen, press the
Add Device button. If viewing Device Manager on the
Home screen, press “Pair Bluetooth® headphones”.
2. From the pop-up, press “Search For Headphones”.
The system will begin searching for the Bluetooth®
signal of your headphones.
3. Select the name of your headphones from the list of
possible devices. The system will connected to the
headphones.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will connect to previously paired
Bluetooth® headphones after Passenger Screen acti-
vation.
Removing Bluetooth® Headphones
1. From the Controls screen, press the Manage
Headphones button.
2. Press the Settings button (gear icon) next to the set of
headphones you wish to remove.
3. Press “Delete Device”; the Bluetooth® headphones
will be removed from the system.
NAVIGATION
Navigation allows you to assist the driver in searching for
destinations using Uconnect’s built-in Navigation system.
For information on the full functionality of Navigation, refer
to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
When a new route is selected from the Passenger Screen,
a confirmation will be sent to the driver. The driver will be
able to confirm or deny the route.
NOTE:
Using Navigation on the Passenger Screen will not affect
the Navigation screen in the Uconnect system. The Driver
can continue to use Navigation while the Passenger
Screen can “suggest” new routes or stops.
CAMERA
Camera will display the equipped vehicle camera feed.
When selected, press the desired Camera button. The
feed from that camera will display in the center of the
touchscreen. Press the X button or Back Arrow button to
return to the Home screen.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will lose access to a camera if the
driver chooses to view it on the Uconnect system or if a
condition would activate the camera on the Uconnect
system (the rearview camera being activated when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE).
3RD PARTY APPS — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, your vehicle may contain some 3rd party
apps, which will further enhance your Uconnect system.
McIntosh
McIntosh is a 3rd party app that can enhance your
Uconnect system’s media player. For the app to be
effective, there must be audio playback in the Uconnect
media player. McIntosh can control the playback of audio
as well as display the output level decibel meters.
To launch the app, begin playing audio and follow these
steps:
1. Press the Apps button.
2. Press the McIntosh app.
McIntosh
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
The McIntosh app will allow you to perform the following when listening to music:
NOTE:
The Seek feature will not work while using Bluetooth®.
NOTE:
To change the source within the app, press the source name. Pressing this will open a menu with all available sources. To change the audio source outside of the app, press the Media
button, and then press the Sources button.
To exit the app, press any of the buttons on the bottom menu bar.
Skip Backward Press to skip backward. Press and hold to fast rewind.
Play/Pause Press to play/pause the track.
Skip Forward Press to skip forward. Press and hold to fast forward.
Repeat
Press to repeat track. Press again to repeat playlist. Press again to turn off (works only
with a USB device).
Change Channel Down
Press to change channel down. Press and hold to seek channel down. While using AM/
FM, pressing the channel down will change the frequency by 0.1. Pressing and holding in
AM/FM will seek channels.
Change Channel Up
Press to change channel up. Press and hold to seek channel up. While using AM/FM,
pressing the channel up will change the frequency by 0.1. Pressing and holding in AM/FM
will seek channels.
Menu Press to access McIntosh settings.
About Press to learn more about McIntosh.
Audio Press to open the audio settings page of the Uconnect media player.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
Day/Night Mode
Press the Menu button in the upper left-hand corner to
access McIntosh settings. Tap on a mode to set it as the
default, or tap “Auto Mode” to enable your screen to
automatically switch between Day and Night Modes.
Theater Mode
Press the Menu button in the upper left-hand corner to
access McIntosh settings. Under Theater Mode, select
“On” to bring forward the McIntosh Meters. This will
enlarge the meters for a more prominent view.
NOTE:
Theater Mode will engage after 10 seconds without input
from the user.
For more information on McIntosh, the McIntosh app and
its functionality, please visit https://
www.mcintoshlabs.com.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED
OVERVIEW
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is designed
to give your family years of enjoyment.
Fire TV lets passengers enjoy a wide variety of content
from popular apps (subscriptions may be required).
Stream videos, play games, listen to music, get
information, and watch downloaded programs all while on
the road. Two Voice Remotes with Alexa are included with
the system. Press the Microphone button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa to easily find, launch, and control
content. Check sports scores, play music, control smart
home devices, or see your live camera feeds (compatible
smart home device required and sold separately). In
addition to streaming and downloaded content, changing
the input in Fire TV also enables you to:
Mirror what’s on your phone or tablet to Fire TV via
Miracast capable devices
Stream your favorite shows with Fire TV
Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
Listen to audio over wired or wireless headphones (not
included, customer will have to provide their own or
play audio through in-cabin speakers with Listen In
feature in front seat.)
Plug and play a variety of devices into the front seat
Video USB port. USB ports located under the rear
screens are charge only.
Watch content individually on each rear display or
mirror across both displays to watch together
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in an active and usable cellular range
and properly equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV package. Streaming
requires a Wi-Fi connection and registered Amazon
account to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service
subscriptions are not included. Services and features are
subject to change or withdrawal at any time, may not be
available in all areas and languages, and may require
separate subscriptions.
Please review this Owner's Manual to become familiar
with RSE features and operation.
GETTING STARTED
Rear Screen Entertainment for Uconnect 5/5 NAV
There are four different ways to operate the features of
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in:
Voice Remote with Alexa
Front radio screen
Passenger screen (if equipped)
Individual rear touchscreens for Rear Seat Entertain-
ment with Fire TV built-in touch on each rear screen
For information on the front media hub USB/AUX ports
Ú page 74.
1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen)
2 — Headphone Jack
3 — USB C Charging Port
4 — HDMI Port
5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
E
NTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV BUILT-IN
FROM THE FRONT RADIO SCREEN
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in system by following these steps:
Option 1
1. Press the Media button.
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.
Option 2
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the
touchscreen. You may need to navigate to different
pages in the Apps drawer to find the Uconnect
Theater button.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
E
NTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV BUILT-IN
FROM THE REAR SCREENS
You can also access your Rear Seat Entertainment with
Fire TV built-in by choosing one of the following options:
Option 1
The system will automatically turn on when the vehicle
is started. Pushing the power button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa will turn the system back on if it was
manually shut off. If the screen is inactive and goes to
a screen saver, the system can be woken up by either
tapping the screen or pushing any button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa.
Option 2
Swiping on either of the rear touchscreens.
NOTE:
When using the rear screens, the system will launch with
Fire TV.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
E
NTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV BUILT-IN
FROM THE PASSENGER SCREEN —
I
F EQUIPPED
You can also access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in content from the Passenger Screen.
Follow these steps:
1. Access the Home screen for the Passenger Screen.
2. Swipe right on the Home screen and select Fire TV
Rear Seat Entertainment Controls.
FIRST TIME STARTING UP
(U
SING THE REAR SCREENS)
Boot-up Screen
When turning on the system for the first time from the rear
screens, a boot-up screen will appear on the system
displaying the Fire TV logo.
During this boot-up sequence, language options will be
available for the system.
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing
After the boot-up sequence is complete, the system will
then give the option to pair a Voice Remote with Alexa (two
are included with the system).
Follow the on-screen instructions for how to pair a Voice
Remote with Alexa to the system. Two Voice Remotes with
Alexa are included to be paired with each rear screen.
A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each rear
screen. It will function with the rear screen it was paired
with. The pairing steps will need to be done for each rear
screen.
NOTE:
If the Voice Remote with Alexa pairing fails, on-screen
instructions will appear for trying to pair again.
Connecting to a Network
During the start-up process, the system will need to be
connected to a network to function. Multiple network
sources can be options for the system.
Some options for a network connection are:
Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if activated,
it will show as a possible network for the system on the
screen).
Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network.
In-vehicle Wi-Fi.
NOTE:
When a network is connected to the system for the first
time, an over-the-air-software update will take place using
the Wi-Fi connection. It is recommended that an unlimited
Wi-Fi connection, if available, be used during this update.
After this first-time update, updates will only occur when
one is available.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
Account Sign-in
The next step will be the option to sign in to your Amazon
account.
There are two options to sign into the system:
I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with an
already existing Amazon account
I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon Account
If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the on-screen
steps to set up an Amazon account with the system.
Parental Controls
Another feature that will appear during this first time set
up is parental controls.
When the parental controls page appears, it will give the
options “Enable Parental Controls” and “No Parental
Controls”. If “Enable Parental Controls” is selected, follow
the on-screen steps to set up parental controls for the
system.
ALEXA VOICE CONTROL
A feature with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in that enhances your experience is Alexa. It is simple
to get started using this feature. Push the Microphone
button at the top of the Voice Remote with Alexa to
activate Alexa and get started.
LISTEN VIA VEHICLE SPEAKERS
A feature within Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in is the front radio Listen feature. On the front radio
Home screen for Fire TV, select the Listen button in the top
right corner on either card for Screen 1 or 2. This will allow
you to have either rear screen play audio through all the
speakers in the vehicle.
QUICK MENU
Accessing the quick menu will give you more options for
Fire TV.
To access the quick menu, tap the screen and it will
appear. The quick menu is also accessible by pushing the
Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.
Some options of the quick menu are:
Power — This will power the screen off.
On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the on-screen
remote to use with the system.
Back — This will let you go back a page.
Home — This will take you to the Home screen.
Gear/Settings — This will let you access certain settings
in the system. For more setting options, select
“Settings” within the on-screen Gear/Settings menu.
Vehicle — This will bring up the Vehicle menu. From
here you can adjust rear climate controls and the Are
We There Yet? app.
PARENTAL CONTROLS
(U
SING THE REAR SCREENS)
If parental controls were not set during the first time start
up of the system, they can be set by following these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen to access Settings in the
“quick menu”.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Preferences”.
5. Select “Parental Controls”; from here you can turn
Parental Controls on or off and set up a PIN for the
controls using the Voice Remote with Alexa.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA PAIRING
(U
SING THE REAR SCREENS)
If the Voice Remote with Alexa needs to be paired again or
a new remote is being paired, follow these procedures:
1. Install batteries into the remote.
2. Tap the screen and Select the Gear/Settings icon on
the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. In Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”.
6. Follow the on-screen steps for Voice Remote with
Alexa pairing.
A long press on the Home button can also re-pair a Voice
Remote with Alexa that has become disconnected.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is included with two Voice Remotes with
Alexa. A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each
rear screen. It will function with the rear screen it was
paired with. The pairing steps will need to be done for each
rear screen.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
MEDIA SOURCES INPUT (USING THE
F
RONT RADIO AND REAR SCREENS)
Front Radio Screen
Users can select inputs for each rear screen from the front
radio touchscreen by selecting the Rear Seat tab and
choosing the desired content by selecting “Launch
Source” on the Screen 1 or Screen 2 tab.
Inputs available within Launch Source under “Inputs” are
“Fire TV”, “HDMI”, and “USB”.
Rear Screens
To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on the Fire
TV Home screen and select your desired input under
“Input”.
Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in the top
menu. While in this tab, scroll down to “Inputs” for
selection options.
NOTE:
The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend on the
naming of the vehicle’s brand.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
Voice Remote with Alexa
1.
Power Button
— Turns the screen for the selected
channel on or off.
2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has options
by pressing the Circle button Up, Down, Left, or Right
to navigate on-screen for selections and pushing the
center button to confirm selections.
3.
Back — Push to exit out of menus or return to the
previous screen.
4.
Home — Push to return to the Fire TV Home screen.
5.
Seek Backward/Rewind Button
— Push and hold to
fast rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous track.
6. Volume — Push the - button to decrease the volume
and + button to increase the volume.
7.
Channel Guide — Push to access the channel guide
for the system.
8.
Mute — Mutes headphone audio.
9.
Prime Video — Push to launch Prime Video app.
10.
App 1 — Push to navigate to App 1.
11.
Microphone Button — Push to activate Alexa.
12.
Menu — Push to access the Fire TV menu.
13.
Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter.
Push once to skip to the next track.
14.
Play/Pause Button ‖ — Begin/resume or pause disc
play.
15.
Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow button on
the Channel button to browse channels available in
Fire TV.
16.
Recent — Push to access recently viewed content on
Fire TV.
17.
Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting options for
Fire TV.
18.
App 2 — Push to launch App 2.
19.
Vehicle Button — Push to activate the Vehicle menu.
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
REPLACING THE VOICE REMOTE WITH
A
LEXA BATTERIES
Each Voice Remote with Alexa requires two AAA batteries
for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
Voice Remote with Alexa, then slide the battery
cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
battery compartment.
4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE
TV B
UILT-IN STREAMING (USING THE
F
RONT RADIO AND REAR SCREENS)
Access Using Launch Source
To access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
from the front radio, press the Media tab located on the
bottom menu bar. Then select the Rear Seat option
located on the top menu bar. Select “Launch Source”, and
then under “Inputs” select “Fire TV Home”.
Access Using Browse Media
Selecting “Browse Media” on the front radio screen will
give access to different media within Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
These options will be in the top menu of “Browse Media”
and include:
Fire TV — Selecting “Fire TV” will show streaming
options for categories and to select apps. This option
will be selectable on the left slider menu in “Browse
Media”. While in “Browse Media” under Fire TV, it will
display recent activity under “Recent”. This will display
recent videos viewed from Fire TV and recent down-
loads as well.
USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
Access Using the Voice Remote with Alexa and Rear
Screens
Rear passengers will be able to access some options for
streaming by pressing the “Prime Video”, “App 1”, or
“App 2” button on the Voice Remote with Alexa. Selecting
one of those buttons on the Voice Remote with Alexa will
take you to the home page for that respective streaming
service. Turning on either of the rear screens will launch
Fire TV. By default, the rear screens will always launch in
Fire TV. More streaming options can be selected on the
Fire TV home page.
Fire TV
Fire TV is your source for online streaming with Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
NOTE:
A data source needs to be connected to the system for
streaming to be accessible. This can be set up when Fire
TV is turned on for the first time on the rear screens. Some
options can be an in-vehicle 4G Wi-Fi hot spot, capable
Wi-Fi hot spot from a mobile device, or Wi-Fi from an
outside source like a home or a garage.
To access Fire TV on the front screen, select “Launch
Source” on the front touchscreen, Rear Seat screen and
then “Fire TV Home” under “Inputs”.
Viewing from the front radio screen or passenger screen
mirrors or controls the Fire TV experience from one of the
rear Fire TV displays.
The menu bar for Fire TV will have the options for “Home”,
“Find”, “Library”, “Brand”, and “Live”.
Below the menu bar will be streaming options linked to
your Prime account like “Prime Video”.
The front radio screen offers some options:
Power — This will turn Fire TV on or off.
Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles between
the Rear Screens (for use with front radio screen only).
Collapse — While viewing on the front radio screen, this
will collapse the screen to dashboard view.
Source Drawer — This will open the “Source Drawer”
and the source logo will be displayed on the icon.
Browse Media — This will open the “Browse Media”
pop-up.
Back — This will let you go back the previous page.
Fire TV Home — This will take you back to the Fire TV
home page.
Menu — This will open the Fire TV menu.
Remote icon — This will display the on-screen remote.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
NOTE:
Front radio screen mirroring and watching can only be
done when the vehicle is in PARK. The vehicle must be in
an active and usable cellular range and properly equipped
with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and Rear Seat Enter-
tainment with Fire TV package. For streaming, a Wi-Fi
connection and registered Amazon account are required
to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service subscrip-
tions are not included. Services and features are subject
to change or withdrawal at any time, may not be available
in all areas and languages, and may require separate
subscriptions.
FIRE TV APPS/GAMES
(USING THE REAR SCREENS)
Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the system and
select “Find” in the top menu. On the Find page, select
“Appstore”. Within the App Store
®
you can purchase apps
and games. From here you can also select from all the
apps and games that have been purchased.
ARE WE THERE YET?
When a navigation route has been set from the Uconnect
system, the second-row passengers can use “Are We
There Yet?” for an animated screen showing distance and
time remaining on navigation routes, as well as the
estimated time of arrival with pop-up notifications.
Some screen information includes:
Decrease Timing Between Notifications Button
Notifications ON/OFF Button
Increase Timing Between Notifications Button
Arrival Time
Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached
Distance Remaining
To access “Are We There Yet?” from the rear screens,
follow these steps:
1. Tap one of the rear screens and select the Vehicle
icon or push the Vehicle button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa.
2. Select “Are We There Yet?” near the bottom of the
menu on the first page of options.
USING THE VIDEO USB PORT
Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and play your
favorite music or movies.
NOTE:
To view USB media on the rear screens, insert a USB drive
into the port. The USB drive port is located under the radio
controls in the instrument panel.
On the rear screen you can browse the content of the USB
device by going to the USB source in the inputs. Use the
search feature to find your media faster.
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to either of the HDMI
ports located behind either of the first row seats.
Headphone Jack/HDMI/USB
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games may exceed the power limit
of the vehicle's Power Inverter
Ú page 78.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in does not
come equipped with headphones. Customers will need to
provide their own wireless headphones that can be paired
with the system using Bluetooth®. Customers can also
use their own wired headphones and plug them into a
Headphone Jack located under one of the rear screens.
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
3 — HDMI Port
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
Wireless Headphones Pairing
To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in using the rear screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth® Devices”.
5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow the on-screen steps for pairing.
While multiple headphones can be paired, only one will output audio at a time.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in Ú page 62.
Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the Vehicle menu. Tap on either rear screen and select the Vehicle icon or press the Vehicle button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.
Then select the Rear Climate Controls option.
Options within Rear Climate Controls are:
Icon Description
ON
Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls on.
OFF
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
SYNC
SYNC Button
Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between Manual mode and Automatic mode.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the temperature. The
temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
Headliner Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
1,2,3, etc.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.
Icon Description
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
LEGAL & COMPLIANCE
To access Legal and Compliance information about Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in from the rear
screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in the Settings menu, select “My Fire TV” and
then “Legal & Compliance”.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages, which
provides the vehicle status information while operating on
off-road conditions. It supplies information relating to the
vehicle ride height, the status of the transfer case, the
pitch and roll of the vehicle, and the active Selec-Terrain
Mode.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road button on
the touchscreen from the Vehicle menu, and then press
“Launch Off-Road”.
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
Vehicle Dynamics
Accessory Gauges
Pitch & Roll
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
Suspension — If Equipped
NOTE:
With a Connected Services subscription, you can record
your Off-Road data and send it directly to the mobile app.
Press the Record button to begin.
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom
of Off-Road Pages and is present on each of the selectable
page options. It provides continually updating information
for the following items:
Current Transfer Case Status
Current Selec-Terrain mode
Current Latitude/Longitude
Current Altitude of the vehicle
Status of Hill Descent
Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control Selected
Speed in mph (km/h).
Status Bar
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of the Rear Axle Locker — If Equipped
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil
Pressure, Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch
(angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in
degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualization of
the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
1 — Vehicle Dynamics
2 — Steering Angle
3 — Transfer Case
4 — Rear Axle Status
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Transmission Temperature
5 — Battery Voltage
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
5
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current Selec-Terrain
Mode through a high resolution image. Adjusting the
Selec-Terrain Mode will alter the image on the screen. The
vehicle must be in the ON/RUN position to display
Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low
Sand/Mud
Snow
Auto — Default
Sport
NOTE:
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar will also display the current
Selec-Terrain Mode.
SUSPENSION — IF EQUIPPED
The Suspension page displays information concerning the
vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
Wheel Articulation
Current Ride Height Status
Off-Road 2
Off-Road 1
Normal
Aero
Entry/Exit
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by a yellow color
in the Wheel Articulation. If Ride Height is adjusted, the
Ride Height indicator on the screen will switch to the
appropriate height and the Wheel Articulation will show
the movement and change in height.
Suspension Menu
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio
Ú page 360.
1 — Wheel Articulation
2 — Current Ride Height
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
227
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue
to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
WARNING!
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA alerts of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats through a visual and
auditory notification. When the system is activated, it
displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory alert
upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF position to
exit the vehicle. The system will activate automatically if a
rear door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
placed in the ON/RUN position. RSRA should be used as a
reminder to check the rear seats, it does not directly
detect objects, passengers, or pets and is only activated
when the previous conditions are met.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
Ú page 187.
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION (DDD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
DDD detects when the driver is feeling fatigued and warns
the driver to pull over and take a break.
To Activate/Deactivate
DDD can be activated and deactivated through the
Uconnect system by selecting the following in order:
1. “Safety & Driving Assistance”
2. “Drowsy Driver Detection”
System Intervention
Using feedback obtained from the driver’s steering
patterns, any buttons/switches that are pressed, and from
the front camera, the system implements two operating
logics:
The first operating logic takes the driving style into
account, observing the road and detecting to what
extent the driver can continue driving with few lane
crossing events.
The second operating logic measures the time spent
behind the wheel with the vehicle speed above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and below 100 mph (160 km/h).
If the driving style indicates that the driver is unable to
follow the road trajectory and respect the horizontal lane
markings while within the operating speed range of the
system, a pop-up will display on the instrument cluster
display to suggest that the driver should stop for a break.
An audible signal will also sound.
If the driver
accepts the suggestion provided by the
system by pushing the “OK” button on the left side of the
steering wheel, the message will disappear from the
display.
If the driver
does not acknowledge the warning it will be
displayed for 60 seconds and then disappear.
NOTE:
In the event of a DDD system failure, a dedicated message
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
DDD Warning Message
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does not
relieve the driver of the responsibility of driving the
vehicle. If you experience fatigue while driving, pull over
safely for a break without waiting for the DDD to
intervene. Only return to the road when you are in the
right physical and mental condition to prevent
endangering yourself and other drivers.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC system.
This system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
Intersection Collision Assist (ICA), and Traction Control
System (TCS). These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit
of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of
the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if
equipped). See
Ú page 230 for a complete explanation of
the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The
capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting these conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and
release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Multiple
attempts may be required to return to "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previ-
ously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle
speed while descending hills during various
driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed
by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven
down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for
HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not acti-
vate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. When actively controlling HDC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-
tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the
driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds, then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds, then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
see Ú page 96 for further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 187 for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It
functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the
driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) is intended for
off-road driving in 4WD Low only. SSC
maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
following conditions are met:
Driver releases throttle.
Driver releases brake.
Transmission is in any selection other than PARK.
Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the
SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and
the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. While actively controlling SSC the
transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
SSC performance is influenced by the Select-Terrain
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h)
Vehicle is shifted to PARK
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has an LED which offers feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash then extin-
guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if the TCS and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is
recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations
Ú page 171.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside the
rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane in
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the side of the vehicle, near the B-pillar,
and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors
the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed is 7 mph (11 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas. BSM will alert earlier
on faster-approaching vehicles – up to 33 mph (54 km/h)
difference.
NOTE:
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your
vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the
adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in random false detections
on the trailer, and false chimes when the turn signal is
used
Ú page 187.
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud, or
other road contaminations accumulate on the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located. The system
may also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in
areas with extremely low radar returns such as a desert or
parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is detected,
a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Sensor Blocked”
message will display in the cluster, both mirror lights will
illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not occur. This is
normal operation. The system will automatically recover
and resume function when the condition clears or when
an ignition cycle occurs. To minimize system blockage, do
not block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper
stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors. In addition, when the turn
signal is activated during the alert on the side of the
vehicle corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime) alert
can be heard. During this audible (chime) alert, the radio
volume will be reduced
Ú page 237.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SAFETY
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 33 mph (54 km/h). Fast approaching
vehicles will receive an earlier alert based on relative
speed.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of
less than 13 mph (24 km/h) the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 13 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SAFETY 237
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SAFETY
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION
FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument
cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the
driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings
and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does
not take action based upon these progressive warnings,
then the system will provide a limited level of active
braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by
braking and the system determines that the driver intends
to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied suffi-
cient brake force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins
at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill
for two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles, such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the FCW
system will be automatically deactivated.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SAFETY 239
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using an audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than “Medium” setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible
collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in
the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h),
the system may provide maximum braking to mitigate the
potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. If the PEB
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes. When the system determines a
collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you is no
longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SAFETY
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the system
to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the pedes-
trian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
control settings
Ú page 187.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button once.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button again.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the system,
so no warning or active braking will be available in case of
a possible frontal collision with the pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down. The system will not reset to
the default setting when the vehicle is restarted.
Intersection Collision Assist (ICA) —
If Equipped
ICA uses three front radar sensors located in the front
fascia/bumper, to detect oncoming vehicles from the front
or side when driving through an intersection. When the
system determines that a collision is probable when
turning across oncoming traffic, the system will attempt to
mitigate a possible collision by decelerating the vehicle.
When the system determines that a collision with a
crossing vehicle is probable, the system may apply
additional braking to supplement the driver braking input
to attempt to mitigate a possible collision. The system will
also provide audible warnings and visual warnings (shown
in the instrument cluster). If the driver determines
acceleration is needed to avoid a collision, when the
accelerator is pressed ICA will cancel.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
For information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires, see
Ú page 331.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold
tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the
recommended cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every
type of potential collision with a pedestrian. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling
the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SAFETY 241
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires have
been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illu-
mination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly check the
tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper
pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of
the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster, and a graphic
displaying tire pressures
TPMS Warning Light
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warn-
ings have been established for the tire size equipped
on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a poor
overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use Original Equip-
ment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper
TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated, when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX"
message and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) in a different color
Ú page 96.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
BAR, or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and
inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of
the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The instrument cluster display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five
seconds. This message is then followed by a graphic
display, with “--“ in place of the pressure value(s),
indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault
can occur by any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
There is no Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor in the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light will remain on, a chime will
sound, and the instrument cluster display will still display
a pressure value in the different color graphic display and
an “Inflate to XX” message will be displayed. After driving
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. For
each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the instrument cluster display will display a "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
display will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SAFETY 243
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be
deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies
(road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel
and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature in the apps menu of the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time. The user is required to wait
until the hazard lights STOP flashing or 26-30 seconds
after the desired pressure is achieved in one wheel
before switching to another.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system is
in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects an
increase in tire pressure while filling the tire. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode with the transmission in
PARK.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire
Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lights will come on to confirm the vehicle is in
Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lights do not come on
while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensor may be in an inoperative position,
preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know when to
stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended
pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user
continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) —
If Equipped
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an optional
feature that is included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert
system. The system is designed to allow you to select a
pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and rear
axle tires to, and to provide feedback while inflating or
deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is located
in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you will be able
to select a pressure setting for both the front and rear axle
tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure range from
greater than or equal to 15 psi to XX psi in 1 psi
increments for each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SAFETY
You may also store pressure values chosen for each axle
in the Uconnect system application as preset pressure
values. Up to two sets of preset pressure values can be
stored in the Uconnect system for the front and rear axle.
Once you select the tire pressures for the front and rear
axles that you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin
inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one
tire at a time. The user is required to wait until the hazard
lights STOP flashing or 26-30 seconds after the desired
pressure is achieved in one wheel, before switching to
another.
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in
PARK. The hazard lights will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the
hazard lights do not come on while inflating or deflating
the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor may
be in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may
need to be moved slightly forward or backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are inflated/
deflated. The horn will chirp under the following STFA
states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure
is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or
deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overin-
flated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is
added or removed to reach proper selected pressure
level.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 262.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint
Ú page 262.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú page 356 for customer service contact
information.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle
speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
WARNING!
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
WARNING!
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Third Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The third row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to
detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored
out of the way in the headliner for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front
seats when the seat is not occupied.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly
behind third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
Routing The Third Row Seat Belt Latch Plate
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Third Row Center Seat Belt Buckled
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
into the center slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt
will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch
plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
Third Row Belt Guides
NOTE:
There are three belt guides located on the top of the seat
backs, one for each seating position in the third row. They
can be used to keep the shoulder belt in a fixed position
for additional comfort, if needed.
Third Row Belt Guides
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occu-
pant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper
restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a colli-
sion.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 268.
The figure provided illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Seven Passengers (Second Row Captain’s Chairs) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Eight Passengers (Second Row Bench) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click”.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After
the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 105.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air
bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a
full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never
allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a
child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines
the most probable classification of the occupant that it
detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in
an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint
Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child in a
forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Reduced-power
deployment OR Full-power
deployment
Properly seated adult
Full-power deployment OR
reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat
Reduced-power
deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable
to classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the
operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on,
or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed. Do not make
any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat
cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an after-
market seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a
collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air
bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
(Continued)
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components list provided:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
(Continued)
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described here. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have
the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: https://
tc.canada.ca/en/road-transportation/
child-car-seat-safety
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in
the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who are over two years old or who have outgrown the
rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-
facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no”, then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Seven Passenger (Captain’s Chairs Second Row)
LATCH Positions
Eight Passenger (Second Row Bench) LATCH Positions
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Second Row LATCH Positions (Seven Passenger) Second Row LATCH Positions (Eight Passenger)
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for
using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and
tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by
the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual
for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
Third Row LATCH Position (Seven And Eight Passenger)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Seven And Eight Passenger Vehicles: Second Row Upper
Tether Anchorage Locations
Seven Passenger Top Tether Anchorages (Captain's Chairs)
Eight Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
(Second Row Bench)
Seven And Eight Passenger Vehicles: Third Row Upper
Tether Anchorage Locations
Tether Anchorages (Third Row Bench)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Seven Passenger And Eight Passenger Third Row Seating:
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. See
Ú page 268 for typical
installation instructions.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
Eight Passenger Second Row Seating:
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions provided. See
Ú page 268
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For the second row seats, and
third row left outboard seat, move the seat back
rearward to the fourth locking position from full upright
to attach the seat to the lower LATCH anchorages.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position. Adjust the seat back forward to the
most vertical locking position. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward, you may wish to move
it to its rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 270 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. For typical installation
instructions, see
Ú page 268.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor
Ú page 251.
Please see the table provided and the following sections
for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Seven Passenger (Captain’s Chairs Second Row) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Eight Passenger (Second Row Bench) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for
using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward-facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child
Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward-facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See
Ú page 270 for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. If the seat can be moved, you may need
to move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
Ú page 265 for
the location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SAFETY 271
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(Eight Passenger Seating)
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Second Row Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
(Seven Passenger Seating)
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SAFETY
(Continued)
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 113.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 244.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized
dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SAFETY 273
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
6
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
275
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
center console just below the climate control screen.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when your
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and
SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
Ú page 360.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be
connected to a representative for assistance. Road-
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
side Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving
and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside
assistance.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Connected Services, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to a SOS operator, during which the LED will blink
green. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press the cancel-
lation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the overhead
console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green once
a connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional assis-
tance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a
voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to speak with
you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds
occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates
the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The overhead console lights located within the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead
console light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension system,
there is a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled before changing a tire. This feature can be acti-
vated through the Uconnect system
Ú page 204.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
Before changing a tire or using the jack please disable the
hands free lift gate, This feature can be disabled through
the Uconnect system
Ú page 187.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if
changing the driver’s front tire, block the passenger’s
rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being raised or lifted.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
WARNING!
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
JACK AND TOOLS LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in
the rear cargo area, under the load floor.
1. Lift up on the load floor handle to access the jack
and tool storage.
Load Floor Handle
2. Remove the jack storage cover to access the jack and
tools.
Jack And Tools Access Cover
3. Pull up to remove jack and tools from storage.
Removing Jack And Tools
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, tools shown may vary.
Jack And Tools Storage
Jacking Tools Description
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire drive”
nut. The nut is located under a rubber plug at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
1 — Tow Hook (If Equipped)
2 — Wheel Lug Wrench
3 — Jack Handle Extension
4 — Fuel Funnel
5 — Jack Handle
6 — Scissor Jack
7
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Spare Tire Location
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear
cargo area on the outside of the vehicle.
1. Assemble the jacking tools.
Jacking Tool Assembly
2. Locate and remove plug from the storage
compartment floor to expose the winch access hole.
Winch Nut Plug
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the wheel lug wrench and extension to completely
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle counter-
clockwise until the winch stops.
Winch Drive Nut Location
Wrench Rotation
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear fascia/bumper.
5. Pull the metal retainer toward you to release it.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack
wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power
tool may damage the winch.
1 — Wheel Lug Wrench
2 — Jack Handle Extension
3 — Jack Handle
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
(Continued)
6. Slide the retainer up the steel extension tube and
winch cable. Rotate the retainer and push it through
the hole in the wheel.
Releasing Winch Retainer
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts,
using the lug wrench by turning them counter-
clockwise, one turn, while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Loosen Lug Nuts
2. Assemble the jack and tools Ú page 280.
Jack And Tool Assembled
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
back of the wheel facing the ground.
WARNING!
7
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the
vehicle to prevent tool damage. See the following images
for proper jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
3. When changing a front tire, place the scissor jack
under the front chassis lifting point, as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol shown in the following
image.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
4. When changing a rear tire, place the scissor jack
under the rear chassis lifting point, as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol shown in the following
image.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is fully engaged.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
5. Raise the vehicle by using the wheel lug wrench and
jack handle to turn the jack screw clockwise. Raise
the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare
tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and
install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque
Ú page 350. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench
by an authorized dealer or at a service station.
Tighten Lug Nuts
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
7
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
10. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper
with the valve stem facing inward. Push the end of the
winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve through the
front side of the road wheel. Making sure the back of
the wheel is facing the ground when the wheel is
stowed.
Reinstalling Winch Retainer
11. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is directly
under the winch and between the rear fascia/bumper
and exhaust system heat shields. Raise the tire by
turning the lug wrench on the winch extension
clockwise until it clicks/ratchets three times to make
sure the cable is tight.
Storing Of Road Wheel
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable may
result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
Road Wheel Stowage
12. Lower the jack to the fully closed position.
13. Return the Jack and tools back into the jack storage
bin. Reinstall the jack storage cover by firmly pushing
down until the clips lock into position.
14. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
15. Have the road wheel and tire repaired as soon as
possible and properly secure the spare tire, jack and
tool kit.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more than
50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
(Continued)
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
Positive (+) Jump Starting Post
NOTE:
The positive
(+) battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive
(+) symbol on
or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables’ reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not touch
each other, or either vehicle, until properly connected for
jump starting.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables
are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
7
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt.
The ground must be away from the battery and the
fuel injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, see the following discon-
necting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
have the battery and charging system tested at an
authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
Cap-Less Fuel System, which is located with the jack and
tools
Ú page 279. If refueling is necessary, while using an
approved gas can, please insert the refueling funnel into
the filler neck opening.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 RPM
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push around the
perimeter of the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door by pushing on the rear outer edge
near the center to unlatch. Do not pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel Location
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is
provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the rear cargo storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating can be:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge is
moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
7
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will
not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB), if possible.
Manual Park Release Location
3. Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the lower
left of the steering column, below the EPB switch.
Access Cover
4. To unlock handle, insert a flathead screwdriver or
similar tool into the lock release, rotate a quarter turn
counterclockwise and hold simultaneously pulling on
the tether strap.
Lock Release
5. Pull the tether strap out as far as it will go, then
release it. The transmission should now be in
NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Tether Strap
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), as
soon as it’s safe, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain control of
the vehicle before activating the Manual Park Release.
If possible, you should apply the parking brake.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your
vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or properly
connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park
Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
6. Release the EPB only when the vehicle is securely
connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and
reinstall the access cover. If the access cover cannot
be reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through 4.
Tether Reinstalled
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position, the
tether will remain outside of the trim panel and the access
cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear
selector. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before rocking
the vehicle
Ú page 230. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ESC OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
7
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described on
Ú page 181.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
Vehicle’s equipped with air suspension, must have Tire Jack Mode Ú page 204 enabled to prevent air suspension movement during towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle
Ú page 288.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Rear-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed Transfer
Case
Four-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions
Ú page 181
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, always secure by tire/wheel straps. Do not attach to front or rear suspension components, body or frame. Damage to your vehicle
will result from improper towing.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels off
the ground) under the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For instruc-
tions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) when
the engine is off
Ú page 288.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels
OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels
ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case
is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case may
be towed (in the forward direction, with
ALL wheels on the
ground),
IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
transmission is in
PARK
Ú page 181.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore
must be towed will
all four wheels
OFF the ground.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with front and rear recovery
tow hooks. The front tow hooks will be located in the lower
fascia/bumper. The rear tow hook is removable and is
located within the jack and tools storage bin under the
load floor of the rear cargo area
Ú page 279.
Emergency Front Tow Hooks
NOTE:
For off road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the
front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
The removable rear tow hook is designed to be used in the
receiver hitch as a recovery option. For rear tow hook
usage, remove the locking pin, place the rear tow hook
into the receiver hitch in any direction and replace the
locking pin.
Removable Rear Tow Hook
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact. Detailed information can be
found on
Ú page 260.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
Ú page 261.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow
truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
293
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and extended idling will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the
next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change or for
engine oil life reset procedure
Ú page 98.
NOTE:
3.0L & 5.7L Engines: Under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), or
12 months, whichever comes first. The engine controller
also monitors the number of hours of engine run time, and
will illuminate the oil change indicator after 350 hours
(which is not likely to be exceeded except for certain fleet
customers with extended engine idling periods).
6.4L Engines: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km), or 6 months,
whichever comes first. The engine controller also monitors
the number of hours of engine run time, and will illuminate
the oil change indicator after 350 hours (which is not likely
to be exceeded except for certain fleet customers with
extended engine idling periods).
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, as necessary.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road
or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs (3.0L Engine).
1
X X
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
Replace spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
1
X
Replace spark plugs (6.4L Engine).
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and
pulley, replace if necessary.
X
Change transfer case fluid. X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.0L ENGINE
1 — Intercooler Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
CHECKING OIL LEVEL — 3.0L ENGINES
The 3.0L engine does not have a traditional “dipstick” and
there is no need to manually check the oil level. If it is
desired to check engine oil level, it can be seen on the
instrument cluster display by navigating to the appropriate
screen under “Vehicle Information”. Use the
up or
down arrow buttons within the steering wheel controls
to find the “Vehicle Information” menu. Then use the
right or left arrow buttons until you reach the “Oil
Level” submenu.
There is a bar on the gauge which shows the oil level. As
long as the oil level is between the minimum and the
maximum it is safe to operate the vehicle. If the oil level is
either too high or too low, a red bar will be illuminated.
When the engine is in need of more oil, the Oil Level
Warning Light will illuminate. This warning will appear for
five seconds. Within the next 300 miles (500 km) you
should add 1 quart of manufacturer specified motor oil to
the engine
Ú page 354.
This light will reappear every time the engine is started
until a safe level is detected. Continuing to operate the
vehicle without adding oil may result in a critically low oil
level and possible engine damage (see “Critically Low”
below).
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine oil,
washer fluid, antifreeze, etc. to minimize spillage onto top
of engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of
the engine should be removed using compressed air or an
absorbent cloth.
Oil Level Display - How To Refresh
In vehicles equipped with the 3.0L engine, the oil level is
automatically monitored when the vehicle is parked on a
level surface, the oil is warm and the engine has been off
four minutes. To refresh the oil level display (after a quart
of the correct oil has been added), follow this process:
Run the engine until the oil temperature is above
120°F (49°C).
Park the vehicle on relatively level ground.
Turn the engine off and cycle the ignition back to the
RUN position. Wait four minutes with the engine off,
and the ignition in the RUN position.
Start the engine and the new oil level will be available
in the Vehicle Information menu (accessible via the
navigation buttons on the steering wheel).
NOTE:
If there has not been a notable change in the oil level
since the previous reading, there may not be any notifi-
cation or change in the display after the system has
taken another reading.
The oil level system takes measurements only while
the engine is off, has warm oil, and the vehicle is
parked on reasonably level ground. In order to get a
consistent oil level reading the ignition must be in the
RUN position for four minutes, however the system
may occasionally take readings with the key OFF during
normal usage.
If you have added a quart of oil and the indicator is not
reading 3/4 or full, please contact an authorized dealer
for service.
NOTE:
After adding oil to the engine, always reinstall the oil
cap securely by rotating clockwise until it stops. Never
run the engine without the oil fill cap as this could
cause an oil leak.
Because the oil level is automatically detected only
when the engine has been off and restarted (after four
minutes), the system cannot immediately detect a
sudden drop in oil level while driving (for example, if the
oil pan starts to leak due to damage during an off-road
event).
Oil Level Critically Low
(Add 2 Quarts)
Oil Level Low (Add 1 Quart)
Oil Level Ok
Oil Level Critically High
WARNING!
Be aware the oil cap may be hot. Please use suitable
gloves. WARNING: risk of burns!
CAUTION!
Do not to add too much oil. Overfilling the oil may
damage the engine.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL — 5.7L & 6.4L
E
NGINES
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the
washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low
fluid level, the Low Washer Fluid Warning Light will turn on
and the "Washer Fluid Low" message will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level
at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When
refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid
and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper
blades, this will help blade performance. To prevent
freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine oil,
washer fluid, antifreeze, etc. to minimize spillage onto top
of engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of
the engine should be removed using compressed air or an
absorbent cloth.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
Water will never have to be added, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
If the “Critically Low or Critically High” Oil Level Warning
Light is illuminated, the following steps should be
taken:
Critically Low: add two quarts of manufacturer speci-
fied oil as soon as possible
Ú page 354. Continuing
to operate the vehicle with “Critically Low” oil level
may damage the engine.
Critically High: contact an authorized dealer for
service. Continuing to operate the vehicle with “Criti-
cally High” oil level may damage the engine.
Do not use any oils that are not manufacturer specified
and API approved.
Used engine oil and oil filters contain substances which
are harmful to the environment. When oil and filters are
changed contact an authorized dealer and dispose of in
a safe and responsible manner.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water. Refer to Jump Starting Procedure
Ú page 285.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 354.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and then
quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is normal
and will not harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is
started then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound. Other
causes could be if the vehicle is unused for an extended
period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick or if the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see the
nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil
Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable, only use
filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 293.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen fasteners on the
engine air cleaner filter cover.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover on the outside
edge and push inboard to detach hinge to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner filter
assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove
compartment door. Lift the clip out of glove
compartment door and release into dash panel.
Left Side Of Glove Compartment
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover lid
screws or damage may result.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1 — Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door from its
hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, angle the glove
compartment in order to allow each side travel stop
to release the glove compartment from the dash
panel.
Glove Compartment
5. Pull out on the access door release tab and then pull
down from the top to remove the cabin air filter
access door from the vehicle.
Cabin Air Filter Access Door
6. Push the outside retaining tabs towards the cabin air
filter cover to release the cover from the HVAC
housing.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
7. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Access Door Release Tab
2 — Cabin Air Filter Access Door
1 — Cabin Air Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
1 — Cabin Air Filter
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
8. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage into
the HVAC housing.
9. Align the lower tabs on the access panel and then
push the top in to lock it securely back into the dash
panel.
10. Angle the door to get the glove compartment travel
stops back inside the dash panel.
11. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door
hinge.
12. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and
sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove
compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace the
belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are
not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must
be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new
belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
often.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with the vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper
blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
Wiper Arm And Blade
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grab
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with your left hand. With your right hand, hold the
wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop (far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot from the receptacle on the end of
the wiper arm).
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
The wiper arm does not stay in the service up posi-
tion.
3. Still holding the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO
Ú page 271.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 293.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
position. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON position.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants Ú page 354.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-
ator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important to use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc. to minimize spillage
onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled onto
the top of the engine should be removed using
compressed air or an absorbent cloth.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact a
local authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground, clean up any ground spills immediately. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. For
the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 293.
WARNING!
Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level within the designated marks on the side of
the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean
the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally
low, check the system for leaks.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
Ú page 355. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid
Ú page 355. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 355.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole, when
the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is
15 to 25 ft-lb (20 to 34 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 355.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located on the
passenger side of the engine compartment, behind the
headlamp. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro
fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each
fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse
with metal wires or any other material. Do not place
a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the Power Distribution Center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the Power Distribution Center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Crank Batt
F02 80 Amp Gray – Elec Pwr Str #1
F03 500 Amp Gray – Starter
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
F04 250 Amp Gray – Alternator
F05 80 Amp Gray – Elec Pwr Str #2
F06 Shunt – Aux Battery *
F07 100 Amp Gray – Rad Fan
F08 – – Spare
F09 80 Amp Gray – IPDC
F10 150 Amp Gray – RPDC
F11 150 Amp Gray – PCR *
F12 – – Spare
F13 40 Amp Green – Starter
F14 – 10 Amp Red GNMM */ VPMS *
F15 – 10 Amp Red ECM *
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F17A – 10 Amp Red EPS
F17B – 10 Amp Red ATMM *
F18 – – Spare
F19 30 Amp Pink – BSM #2 Valves *
F20 – – Spare
F21 – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23A – 10 Amp Red ECM / PPU * / MGU * / BSM / SLM
F23B – 10 Amp Red AIR SUSPENSION / ELSD-RR / EPS
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F24 – 20 Amp Blue XFR Fuel Pump *
F25 – – SPARE
F26 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor #2 *
F27 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed #3
F32 – – Spare
F33 30 Amp Pink – PWR Side Steps *
F34 – – Spare
F35 – – Spare
F36 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #1
F37 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F38 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #2
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr #1
F41 – 20 Amp Yellow CADM MAP *
F42 – – Spare
F43 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F44 – – Spare
F45 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
F46 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr #2*
F47 – 10 Amp Red BPCM
F48 – 10 Amp Red CVPAM
F49 – 30 Amp Green Air Suspension Valves
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pmp * / FPCM *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – – Spare
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp LT
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 50 Amp Red – Air Suspension
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – – Spare
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Camera Washer Frt
F64 – – Spare
F65 – 15 Amp Blue ACT Grille Shutter / ACT Air Dam / Coolant Valve LCVM * / RATVM
F66 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F67 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / Switchable Engine Mount / BSM #2
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp RT
F69 – – Spare
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow IGN Coil * / IGN Cap */ Fuel Inj */ ISCM *
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
F74 – 5 Amp Tan MGU *
F75 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F76 – – Spare
F77 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F78 – 20 Amp Yellow Short Runner Valve / ECM
F79 – 15 Amp Blue
Fuel INJ * / Surge Solenoid * / Oil Sensor * / Air Valve * / OBD
Bypass * / O2 Heaters *
F80 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F81 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed #4
F82 – – Spare
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – 10 Amp Red PCR *
F86 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed 1
F87 – – Spare
F88 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed 2
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
F89 – – Spare
F90 – – Spare
F91 – – Spare
F92 20 Amp Blue – Front De-Icer *
F93 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Pmp *
F94 – 10 Amp Red A/C Comp Clutch
F95 – – Spare
F96 – – Spare
F97 – – Spare
F98A – 15 Amp Blue Cooling Fan *
F98B – 15 Amp Blue Pmp Battery Cooling *
F99 – – Spare
F100 – – Spare
F101 – – Spare
F102 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Pmp *
F103 – – Spare
F104 – – Spare
F105A – – Spare
F105B – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Interior Power Distribution Center
The Interior Power Distribution Center is located under the driver’s instrument panel. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
Interior Power Distribution Center Location
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an authorized dealer.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 – – Spare
F03 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Seat Heater Frt (Steering Wheel) *
F04 – 10 Amp Red Night Vision Module / Driver Monitoring Camera (DMC)
F05 – – Spare
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
F08 – 10 Amp Red
Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module (AGSM) / Steering Column Lock /
HUD
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – – Spare
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Assy Cigar Lighter
F13 – 10 Amp Red
Assy Mirror Inside Rearview / Sunroof Single - Dual Pane / Port UC1
Dual USB RR / Interior Monitoring Camera
F14 – 10 Amp Red Refrigerator Box / In Vehicle Safe *
F15A – – Spare
F15B – – Spare
F16 – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F17 – – Spare
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 10 Amp Red Overhead Console Assy (OHC) W/Sunshade / Intrusion Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake - Aftermarket
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – – Spare
F25 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 – 10 Amp Red
MOD ICS Switch Bank / SW Bank Upper / SW EPB / Aux Switch Bank
Module (ASBM) / Mod HVAC Cntrl Frt / Humidity Rain Light Sensor
(HRLS)
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
Transfer case SW / SW Bank Lower / Mod ICS Switch Bank Rear /
Climate Control Display / Suspension SW *
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heater
F36 – – Spare
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – – Spare
F41A – – Spare
F41B – – Spare
F42A – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
F42B – 10 Amp Red MOD HVAC Control Frt
F43A – – Spare
F43B – – Spare
F44 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Cluster CCN / MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F45 30 Amp Pink – MOD Inverter 150W
F46 – – Spare
F47A – – Spare
F47B – – Spare
F48A – – Spare
F48B – – Spare
F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown MOD RF HUB / Module Ignition (MD KIN)
F50A – 10 Amp Red Port UCI Dual USB Rear
F50B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics 1 & 2
F51A – – Spare
F51B – – Spare
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CMCM (Radio)
F54A – – Spare
F54B – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62A – – Spare
F62B – – Spare
F63A – 15 Amp Blue
Port UC1 Dual USB Frt / Wireless Charging Pad MOD (WCPM) - High/
Premium Only
F63B – 15 Amp Blue Telematics Box Module (TBM) / Mod-DCSD /Mod FPDM
F64A – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F64B – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F65 – 5 Amp Tan MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F66 – – Spare
CB1 – – Spare
CB2 – – Spare
CB3 – – Spare
CB4 – – Spare
CB5 – – Spare
CB6 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Rear Power Distribution Center
Rear Power Distribution Center Location
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The Rear Power Distribution Center is located behind a trim cover of the rear driver’s side quarter panel. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
The following chart corresponds to the fuses inside.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F05 150 Amp Gray – Underhood Power Distribution Center Battery Feed
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 – – Spare
F11 – – Spare
F12 – – Spare
F13 30 Amp Pink – Air Compressor (Tire Inflator)
F14 25 Amp Clear – MTR Sunshade Sunroof
F15A – – Spare
F15B – 10 Amp Red Hands Free Liftgate / Rear Window Switches / MOD HVAC Cntrl Rr
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 25 Amp Clear – Power Liftgate Module
F19A – 10 Amp Red L2+ Driver Alert Lighting Module
F19B – 10 Amp Red Animation Lighting RR-LT
F20A – 15 Amp Blue Central ASAS Decision Module (CADM) - LO
F20B – – Spare
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
F21A – – Spare
F21B – 10 Amp Red Sunroof - Dual Pane 2nd & 3rd Row Seat SW-Illumination
F22 – – Spare
F23 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Entertainment (Driver / Passenger)
F24 – – Spare
F25 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Passenger Frt)
F29A – 10 Amp Red Animation Lighting RR-RT
F29B – 10 Amp Red Animation Lighting RR-LT
F30 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Driver Frt)
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – MOD Door MUX Driver
F35 25 Amp Clear – Integrated Trailer Tow Module #2
F36A – 10 Amp Red Intelligent Event Base Lighting Module
F36B – – Spare
F37 25 Amp Clear – Integrated Trailer Tow Module #1
F38 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 30 Amp Green Mod Audio Amplifier #1A
F41 – – Spare
F42A – 10 Amp Red RSE Video USB Console Frt/Port Media Hub FPDM
F42B – – Spare
F43 – – Spare
F44A – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Ign)
F44B – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Battery)
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heated Seat RR RT)
F46 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #1 *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
F50 – 15 Amp Blue
Seat Massage Driver Mod (SSMD) / Seat Massage Passenger Mod
(SSMP) *
F51 – – Spare
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heat Seat RR LT) *
F53 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Rear #1 *
F54 – – Spare
F55 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Modules 3rd Row Feed #2 *
F56 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
F57 – 10 Amp Red
Mod HVAC RR / Mod Occupant Classic / CVPAM / Mod Parktronics /
ITCM
F58 – 15 Amp Blue
3rd Row Additional USB charge (Only LT - RT) / Port Pwr USB Console
UBS (CH Only)
F59 – – Spare
F60 25 Amp Clear – RR_HVAC Blower
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (Driver) *
F63 30 Amp Pink – Assy Trailer Tow Receptacle B+
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Passenger Rear - Smart Motor
F67 – 30 Amp Green MOD Audio Amplifier #1B
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 20 Amp Yellow L2+ Central ASAS Decision Module (CADM) MID *
F70 – 10 Amp Red Video Routing Module (VRM)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
F74 – – Spare
F75 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. In the event of a light malfunction, please see an authorized dealer for LED replacement.
F76 – – Spare
F77 – – Spare
F78 – – Spare
F79 – – Spare
F80 – – Spare
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (PASS) *
F82 – 10 Amp Red
Animation Lighting RR / Air Compressor (Tire Inflator) / Animation
Lighting Liftgate Taillamp
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – – Spare
F86 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Support Driver & Passenger SW *
F87 – – Spare
F88 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Driver Rear - Smart Motor
CB1 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet RR
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Ú page 170.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
Ú page 170.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lb” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity
for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a quarter of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is
changed after being driven in a Run Flat mode 14 psi
(96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it
is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
For more information
Ú page 240.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information
Ú page 289.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
For further information
Ú page 340.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. For more information
Ú page 340. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
Ú page 332.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spin-
ning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All Season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use All Season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/
h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use
Ú page 177.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
Full-Size Spare — If Equipped
The Full-Size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use Full-Size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please see the following table for recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Wagoneer
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Series 1
Rear
275/65R18
275/55R20
S Class
Series 2
Series 3
275/55R20
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Series 1
Series 2
Rear
275/65R18
275/55R20
S Class
Series 3 275/55R20
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
(Continued)
(Continued)
Grand Wagoneer
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Series 1
Rear 275/55R20 S ClassSeries 2
Series 3
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Series 1
Rear 275/55R20 S ClassSeries 2
Series 3
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION!
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 293. More
frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for
any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitoring System will auto-
matically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks,
we recommend that you take the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Before you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If
your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.
8
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front corner
of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function.
However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts
and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service
station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 351
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than recommended can cause engine failure and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.0L STANDARD OUTPUT ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
requirements, and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance, when using
high-quality unleaded regular gasoline having
an octane rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane premium
gasoline will allow these engines to operate to optimal
performance. This increase in performance is most
noticeable in hot weather or under heavy load conditions
such as while towing.
3.0L HIGH OUTPUT ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations, provide optimal fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality unleaded
premium gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline is required
in this engine.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
6.4L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations, provide optimal fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality unleaded
premium gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline is required
in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated
gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions
and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
9
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask the gasoline retailer whether the
gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 353
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
FLUID CAPACITIES
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Short Wheel Base 26.5 gal 100 L
Long Wheel Base 30.5 gal 115 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L Engine 7.5 qt 7.1 L
5.7L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
6.4L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System *
3.0L Engine 16.6 qt 15.7 L
3.0L Engine Intercooler 3.2 qt 3.0 L
9
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
5.7L Engine 17 qt 16 L
6.4L Engine 18.4 qt 17.4 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Coolant — Intercooler
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.0L SO Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark with a
certification level of API-SP or later
Ú page 301. API-SN+ is also acceptable.
CAUTION!
Usage of earlier API certification levels (such as API-SN or prior) can result in engine
damage and is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil — 3.0L HO Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-A0921. Equivalent
full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have the API Donut trademark
with a certification level of API-SP or later
Ú page 301. API-SN+ is also acceptable.
CAUTION!
Usage of earlier API certification levels (such as API-SN or prior) can result in engine
damage and is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
US Metric
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 355
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine Oil — 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 301.
Engine Oil — 6.4L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-A0921. Equivalent
full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have the API Donut trademark
Ú page 301.
Fuel Selection – 3.0L SO Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.0L HO Engine 91 Octane or Higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol
(Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine 91 Octane or Higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure
to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® Mobile LT.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) - With Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Electronic Limited Slip Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85 with integrated friction modifier.
Axle Differential (Rear) - With Mechanical Limited Slip Differential
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Mechanical Limited Slip Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85 with integrated friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
9
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-833-667-4825 (USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 (CANADA)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in the
Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where
services are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc.,
Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of gas/
fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
833-667-4825/Canada: 800-363-4869. Provide your
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
covered services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you are calling.
Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few
simple questions. You will be given the name of the service
provider and an estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are
in an unsafe situation, please let us know. With your
consent, we will contact local police or safety authorities.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 357
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or
service facility, for services rendered within 30 days of the
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and
service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse you for the
reasonable amount actually paid, based on the usual and
customary charges for that service in the area where they
were provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to
reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be
mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by
FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (833) 667-4825
WAGONEER CLIENT SERVICES CANADA
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: 1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01)
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: 833 (667) 4825
Fax: (787) 782-3345
10
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US
LLC has installed special Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to
a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by dialing
1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01)).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to ensure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for
further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 359
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
361
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 350
Active Driving Assist System ....................................... 143
Active Lane Management System .............................. 160
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) ................................................................ 132
, 134
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 309
Adding Fuel................................................................... 169
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 352
Adjust
Down...........................................................................38
Forward ......................................................................38
Rearward....................................................................38
Up................................................................................38
Adjustable Pedals ...........................................................48
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 254
Air Bag Warning Light ....................................252
, 254
Driver Knee Air Bag ................................................ 258
Enhanced Accident Response ......................260
, 292
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 292
Front Air Bag ........................................................... 254
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 260
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 257
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 261
Maintenance........................................................... 261
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 253
Side Air Bags........................................................... 258
Transporting Pets.................................................... 272
Air Bag Light ........................................................ 252
, 272
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 302
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......................................303
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ..........................................303
Air Conditioner System .................................................303
Air Conditioning
Rear............................................................................ 67
Air Conditioning Filter ............................................70
, 302
Air Conditioning System .......................................... 63
, 69
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .................................... 69
Air Filter .........................................................................302
Air Pressure
Tires..........................................................................338
Alarm
Arm The System......................................................... 24
Disarm The System ................................................... 24
Panic...........................................................................17
Rearm The System.................................................... 24
Security Alarm..........................................................107
Alarm System
Security Alarm..................................................... 23
, 25
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................................10
Amazon FireTV .................................................... 216
, 220
Amazon FireTV Built-in .................................................216
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 309
, 353
Disposal ...................................................................310
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................227
Anti-Lock Warning Light................................................107
Apps...............................................................................214
Arming System
Security Alarm............................................................ 23
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................232
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................187
Auto Down Power Windows ........................................... 79
Auto Hold .............................................................111
, 120
Automatic Folding Mirrors ............................................. 51
Automatic Headlights..................................................... 57
Automatic High Beams .................................................. 57
Automatic Tailgate Release........................................... 85
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 69
Automatic Transmission .....................................115
, 122
Adding Fluid............................................................. 311
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................311
Fluid Change ...........................................................311
Fluid Level Check....................................................311
Fluid Type .......................................................312
, 355
Special Additives.....................................................311
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ...............124
AutoPark ....................................................................... 116
AUX Port .......................................................................... 74
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................................235
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 76
Auxiliary Power Outlet .................................................... 76
Axle Fluid....................................................................... 355
B
Base Instrument Cluster
b
......................................... 94
Battery..................................................................105
, 300
Charging System Light............................................105
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 18
Battery Saver Feature .................................................... 59
Belts, Seat..................................................................... 272
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 306
11
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362
B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 335
Brake Assist System .................................................... 229
Brake Control System, Electronic ............................... 229
Brake Fluid .......................................................... 311
, 355
Brake System ...................................................... 310
, 350
Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................ 350
Fluid Check.............................................................. 311
Master Cylinder....................................................... 311
Parking .................................................................... 118
Warning Light.......................................................... 105
Brake/Transmission Interlock..................................... 122
Bulb Replacement ....................................................... 330
Bulbs, Light................................................................... 273
C
Camera, Night Vision ................................................... 164
Camera, Rear ......................................................163
, 167
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 353
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 296
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 309
Car Washes .................................................................. 348
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................................. 273
, 274
Cargo Area Cover ..............................................86
, 87, 88
Cargo Compartment .......................................................86
Light............................................................................86
Cargo Light ......................................................................86
Cargo Net.........................................................................88
Cargo Tie-Downs .............................................................86
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 226
Center Console Cooler ....................................................73
Center Console Safe .......................................................73
Center Console Safe — If Equipped
b
........................73
Chains, Tire................................................................... 344
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................................................332
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ......113
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety................................271
Checks, Safety ..............................................................271
Child Restraint ..............................................................262
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..........................................................264
Child Seat Installation.............................................270
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .................268
Infant And Child Restraints.....................................263
Locating The LATCH Anchorages............................266
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............265
Older Children And Child Restraints.......................263
Seating Positions.....................................................264
Child Safety Locks .......................................................... 29
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................351
Cleaning
Wheels .....................................................................343
Climate Control ............................................................... 62
Automatic................................................................... 63
Cold Weather Operation...............................................118
Compact Spare Tire ......................................................342
Contract, Service ..........................................................358
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................309
Cooling System .............................................................308
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................309
Coolant Level ...........................................................310
Cooling Capacity......................................................353
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................310
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................308
Inspection ...................................................... 308
, 310
Points To Remember...............................................310
Pressure Cap ...........................................................309
Radiator Cap............................................................309
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........309
, 353, 354
Corrosion Protection .................................................... 347
Cruise Control (Speed Control).................................... 132
Cruise Light..........................................................111
, 112
Customer Assistance ................................................... 356
Customer Programmable Features............................. 187
Cybersecurity ................................................................187
D
Daytime Running Lights................................................. 56
Defroster, Windshield .................................................. 272
De-Icer, Remote Start .................................................... 23
Deluxe Security Alarm .................................................... 25
Diagnostic System, Onboard .......................................113
Digital Rearview Mirror .................................................. 49
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .....................................................299
, 300
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..............................................290
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)....................................310
Door Ajar ....................................................................... 106
Door Ajar Light.............................................................. 106
Door Locks............................................................... 26
, 29
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ............... 29
Doors............................................................................... 26
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt.................................................... 33
Driving ........................................................................... 184
E
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 229
Anti-Lock Brake System..........................................227
Electronic Roll Mitigation...............................229
, 234
Electric Parking Brake..................................................118
Electric Remote Mirrors ................................................. 51
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ..................... 76
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
363
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .................................... 124
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control).................. 133
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 230
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light................... 106
Emergency Braking ...................................................... 239
Emergency Gas Can Refueling.................................... 286
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................................. 289
Hazard Warning Flasher......................................... 275
Jacking..................................................................... 278
Jump Starting.......................................................... 284
Emission Control System Maintenance...................... 113
Engine.................................................................. 296
, 298
Air Cleaner............................................................... 302
Block Heater ........................................................... 118
Break-In Recommendations .................................. 118
Checking Oil Level .........................................299
, 300
Compartment........................................296
, 297, 298
Compartment Identification.......................... 296
, 297
Cooling..................................................................... 308
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................................273
, 274
Fails To Start ........................................................... 117
Flooded, Starting .................................................... 117
Fuel Requirements ........................................351
, 353
Jump Starting.......................................................... 284
Oil.................................................................... 301
, 353
Oil Filler Cap ............................................................ 296
Oil Filter ................................................................... 302
Oil Selection ..........................................301
, 353, 354
Oil Synthetic ............................................................ 302
Starting.................................................................... 115
Engine Oil Life Reset
b
...............................................98
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 260
, 292
Ethanol.......................................................................... 352
Exhaust Gas Cautions......................................... 273
, 274
Exhaust System .................................................. 273
, 307
Exterior Lights .............................................. 55
, 273, 330
F
FamCam System...........................................................164
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................302
Air Conditioning ...................................... 70
, 302, 303
Engine Oil.................................................................302
Engine Oil Disposal..................................................302
FireTV.............................................................................220
Flashers.........................................................................275
Hazard Warning.......................................................275
Turn Signals................................................... 112
, 273
Flash-To-Pass.................................................................. 57
Flooded Engine Starting...............................................117
Fluid Capacities ............................................................353
Fluid Leaks ....................................................................273
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................................311
Engine Oil....................................................... 299
, 300
Fluids And Lubricants...................................................355
Fold-Flat Seats................................................................ 33
Forward Collision Warning ...........................................238
Four Wheel Drive ................................................ 125
, 127
Operation .................................................................125
System .....................................................................125
Four Wheel Drive Operation.........................................125
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................................275
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................................289
Front Axle (Differential) ................................................312
Fuel................................................................................351
Additives...................................................................352
Clean Air...................................................................351
Ethanol..................................................................... 352
Gasoline................................................................... 351
Materials Added......................................................352
Methanol .................................................................352
Octane Rating..........................................................351
Requirements.................................................351
, 353
Specifications..........................................................354
Tank Capacity.......................................................... 353
Fueling ..........................................................................169
Fully Automated ParkSense Active Park Assist..........155
Fuses............................................................................. 313
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).................................. 52
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................................351
Gasoline, Clean Air ....................................................... 351
Gasoline, Reformulated ...............................................351
Gear Ranges .................................................................123
Glass Cleaning.............................................................. 349
Glove Compartment Storage ......................................... 71
Gross Axle Weight Rating.............................................171
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .......................................171
GVWR ............................................................................ 170
H
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................................275
Head Restraints.............................................................. 43
Head Up Display ...........................................................102
Head Up Display (HUD) — If Equipped
b
.................103
Headlights
Automatic .................................................................. 57
Cleaning...................................................................348
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...................... 57
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 58
11
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364
On With Wipers ..........................................................57
Passing .......................................................................57
Heads Up Display ......................................................... 102
Heated Mirrors ................................................................52
Heated Seats...................................................................42
Heated Steering Wheel...................................................30
Heater, Engine Block ................................................... 118
Hill Descent Control ..................................................... 231
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..................................... 231
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 232
Hitches
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 174
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................................52
Hood Prop........................................................................83
Hood Release ..................................................................83
I
Ignition.............................................................................20
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead ...................................20
Key Fob Not Detected ...............................................20
Keyless Ignition..........................................................20
Keyless Push Button .................................................20
Push Button Ignition..................................................20
Switch .........................................................................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key).................................................20
Inside Rearview Mirror.......................................... 49
, 275
Instrument Cluster............................................93
, 95, 96
Display........................................................................96
Menu Items ............................................................. 100
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................................. 349
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ................................. 178
Interior And Instrument Lights .......................................59
Interior Appearance Care ............................................ 348
Interior Lights ..................................................................59
Interior Monitoring Camera..........................................164
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...............................61
Inverter
Power .........................................................................78
J
Jack Location ................................................................279
Jack Operation ..............................................................281
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions ......................278
Jacking Instructions......................................................281
Jump Starting................................................................284
K
Key Fob
Arm The System......................................................... 24
Disarm The System ................................................... 24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 19
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ......... 18
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry)............19
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ ...................................................115
Passive Entry .............................................................27
Passive Entry Programming......................................27
Keys.................................................................................16
Replacement ............................................................. 19
Sentry (Immobilizer) .................................................. 20
Know & Go
b
................................................................. 9
L
Lane Change Assist ........................................................ 59
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................................246
Latches..........................................................................273
Hood........................................................................... 83
Lead Free Gasoline.......................................................351
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................................273
Life Of Tires................................................................... 340
Liftgate ............................................................................ 83
Closing ....................................................................... 84
Hands-Free ................................................................ 85
Opening............................................................... 83
, 84
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .................................... 62
Light Bulbs....................................................................273
Lights.............................................................................273
Air Bag.............................................................252
, 272
Ambient...................................................................... 60
Automatic Headlights ............................................... 57
Brake Assist Warning.............................................. 231
Brake Warning.........................................................105
Bulb Replacement ..................................................330
Cargo.......................................................................... 86
Cruise..............................................................111
, 112
Daytime Running....................................................... 56
Dimmer Switch, Headlight................................. 55
, 60
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .........106
Exterior..............................................................55
, 273
Fog ............................................................................. 58
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................275
Headlights On With Wipers....................................... 57
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 57
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................................ 231
Illuminated Entry....................................................... 60
Interior ....................................................................... 59
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 58
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ...................108
Multicolor Ambient.................................................... 60
Park................................................................... 57
, 111
Passing ...................................................................... 57
Reading...................................................................... 59
Seat Belt Reminder.................................................107
Security Alarm ......................................................... 107
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
365
Service..................................................................... 330
Traction Control ...................................................... 231
Turn Signals ..................................... 55
, 59, 112, 273
Vanity Mirror...............................................................49
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions............. 106
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................................. 104
Load Shed Battery Saver On ....................................... 104
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction......................... 104
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor......................... 104
Loading Vehicle ............................................................ 170
Tires ......................................................................... 335
Locks
Child Protection .........................................................29
Manual .......................................................................26
Power Door.................................................................27
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 306
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 350
M
Maintenance ...................................................................83
Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 300
Maintenance Schedule................................................ 293
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)......108
, 113
Manual
Park Release........................................................... 288
Service..................................................................... 359
McIntosh ....................................................................... 214
Media Hub .......................................................................74
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ..................................31
Memory Seat ...................................................................31
Memory Seats And Radio ...............................................31
Methanol ...................................................................... 352
Mirrors .............................................................................49
Conversation..............................................................50
Electric Remote .........................................................51
Exterior Folding.......................................................... 50
Heated........................................................................ 52
Outside....................................................................... 50
Rearview ...........................................................49
, 275
Tilt In Reverse............................................................ 52
Vanity.......................................................................... 49
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle........................................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.....................................240
Mopar Parts ..................................................................358
MP3 Control .................................................................... 74
Multi-Function Control Lever.......................................... 55
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period........................................118
Night Vision Camera .....................................................164
O
Occupant Restraints.....................................................244
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ....................................351
Off-Road Pages .............................................................224
Oil Change Indicator ....................................................... 98
Reset .......................................................................... 98
Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................302
Oil Filter, Selection........................................................302
Oil Pressure Light..........................................................107
Oil, Engine .....................................................................301
Capacity ...................................................................353
Checking ........................................................ 299
, 300
Dipstick .......................................................... 299
, 300
Disposal ...................................................................302
Filter .........................................................................302
Filter Disposal..........................................................302
Identification Logo ..................................................301
Materials Added To.................................................302
Pressure Warning Light ..........................................107
Recommendation...........................................301
, 353
Synthetic.................................................................. 302
Viscosity...................................................................353
Onboard Diagnostic System ........................................113
Operating Precautions .................................................113
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ......................................................359
Outside Rearview Mirrors .............................................. 50
P
Pages, Off Road............................................................ 224
Paint Care .....................................................................347
Panic Alarm..................................................................... 17
Parking Brake ......................................................108
, 118
ParkSense
Front And Rear ........................................................146
ParkSense Active Park Assist ...................................... 153
ParkSense System, Rear .............................................146
Passenger Screen ........................................................ 210
Passive Entry .................................................................. 27
Pedals, Adjustable.......................................................... 48
Permissions ..................................................................210
Pets ............................................................................... 272
Phone Storage................................................................ 72
Pinch Protection ............................................................. 82
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......................335
Power
Brakes......................................................................350
Distribution Center (Fuses) ................. 313
, 320, 325
Door Locks................................................................. 27
Inverter ...................................................................... 78
11
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366
Mirrors ........................................................................51
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............................76
Seats...........................................................................37
Side Steps ..................................................................27
Steering .......................................................... 130
, 355
Sunroof.......................................................................81
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............................30
Windows .....................................................................79
Power Rear Seats............................................................40
Power Seats
Down...........................................................................38
Forward ......................................................................38
Rearward....................................................................38
Up................................................................................38
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................ 250
Preparation For Jacking............................................... 278
Pretensioners
Seat Belts................................................................ 250
Q
Quadra-Lift.................................................................... 127
Quadra-Trac.................................................................. 125
R
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 339
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)......................... 309
Radio
Sound Setting ......................................................... 205
Radio Operation ........................................................... 226
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 210
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........................................62
Rear Air Conditioning ......................................................67
Rear Axle (Differential)................................................. 312
Rear Camera ....................................................... 163
, 167
Rear Cross Path............................................................237
Rear ParkSense System...............................................146
Rear Seat Entertainment .............................................216
Rear Seat Reminder .....................................................228
Rear Wiper/Washer........................................................ 62
Recreational Towing .....................................................181
Reformulated Gasoline ................................................351
Refrigerant ....................................................................303
Release, Hood................................................................. 83
Reminder, Seat Belt .....................................................245
Remote Control
Starting System .........................................................22
Remote Keyless Entry .................................................... 16
Arm The Alarm ........................................................... 24
Disarm The Alarm......................................................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......................210
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode............................................22
Remote Starting System ................................................22
Replacement Bulbs ......................................................330
Replacement Keys.......................................................... 19
Replacement Tires........................................................340
Reporting Safety Defects .............................................358
Restraints, Child ...........................................................262
Restraints, Head.............................................................43
Roll Over Warning ...........................................................10
Roof Luggage Rack......................................................... 88
Rotation, Tires...............................................................346
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.......................................272
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................................273
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................358
Safety Information, Tire ...............................................331
Safety Tips .................................................................... 271
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..................................................... 273
Schedule, Maintenance...............................................293
Screen, Passenger .......................................................210
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................................... 107
Seat Belts.............................................................245
, 272
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................................248
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage.................. 248
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage.......... 248
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................251
Child Restraints.......................................................262
Energy Management Feature.................................251
Extender................................................................... 250
Front Seat............................................. 245
, 246, 247
Inspection................................................................272
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................................247
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................................248
Lap/Shoulder Belts.................................................246
Operating Instructions ............................................247
Pregnant Women .................................................... 250
Pretensioners .......................................................... 250
Rear Seat.................................................................246
Reminder ........................................................112
, 245
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 250
Seat Belt Reminder.................................................112
Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 248
Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 348
Seats .......................................................... 33
, 37, 38, 42
Adjustment ......................................................... 33
, 38
Bolster........................................................................ 38
Cushion Extender...................................................... 39
Easy Entry .................................................................. 39
Heated ....................................................................... 42
Memory...................................................................... 31
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
367
Power Lumbar............................................................39
Power Massage..........................................................41
Rear Folding...............................................................33
Tilting ..........................................................................33
Vented ........................................................................43
Ventilated ...................................................................43
Second Row USB.............................................................76
Security Alarm ................................................ 23
, 25, 107
Arm The System.........................................................24
Disarm The System....................................................24
Selec-Terrain ................................................................ 127
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist .......... 157
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................................20
Sentry Key Replacement ................................................19
Service Assistance ....................................................... 356
Service Contract........................................................... 358
Service Manuals........................................................... 359
Settings......................................................................... 187
Shifting.......................................................................... 121
Automatic Transmission................................121
, 122
Shoulder Belts.............................................................. 246
Side Steps, Power ...........................................................27
Signals, Turn........................................................ 112
, 273
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 344
Snow Tires .................................................................... 341
Spare Tire Removal...................................................... 280
Spare Tires .................................................279
, 342, 343
Speed Control
Accel/Decel............................................................. 133
Accel/Decel (ACC Only)........................................... 137
Cancel...................................................................... 133
Resume ................................................................... 133
Set............................................................................ 133
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......................... 132
, 133
Starting...................................................................22
, 115
Button......................................................................... 20
Cold Weather ...........................................................118
Engine Block Heater................................................118
Engine Fails To Start ...............................................117
Remote.......................................................................22
Starting And Operating .................................................115
Starting Procedures......................................................115
Steering ...........................................................................30
Power .......................................................................130
Tilt Column................................................................. 30
Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 30
Wheel, Tilt .................................................................. 30
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................210
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls .....210
Steps, Power Side........................................................... 27
Storage ............................................................................ 71
Storage, Vehicle............................................................347
Storing Your Vehicle .....................................................347
Streaming......................................................................216
Sun Roof...................................................................81
, 83
Sun Screens
Second Row Seats ....................................................74
Sun Visor ......................................................................... 50
Sunglasses Storage........................................................ 71
Surroundview Camera..................................................167
Sway Control, Trailer.....................................................234
Synthetic Engine Oil......................................................302
System, Remote Starting ...............................................22
T
Telescoping Steering Column ........................................ 30
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .........................69
Third Party Apps............................................................214
Third Row USB................................................................ 76
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .................................................. 86
Tilt Steering Column....................................................... 30
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................335
Tire Markings................................................................ 331
Tire Safety Information ................................................331
Tires................................................... 273
, 338, 342, 346
Aging (Life Of Tires).................................................340
Air Pressure .............................................................338
Chains...................................................................... 344
Changing.................................................................. 278
Compact Spare........................................................342
General Information.......................................338
, 342
High Speed .............................................................. 339
Inflation Pressure.................................................... 338
Life Of Tires .............................................................340
Load Capacity..........................................................335
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ............109
, 240
Quality Grading........................................................346
Radial....................................................................... 339
Replacement ........................................................... 340
Rotation ................................................................... 346
Safety..............................................................331
, 338
Sizes.........................................................................332
Snow Tires ...............................................................341
Spare Tires ........................................... 279
, 342, 343
Spinning...................................................................339
Trailer Towing ..........................................................177
Tread Wear Indicators ............................................ 340
Wheel Nut Torque ...................................................350
To Open Hood ................................................................. 83
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight.....................................176
Tow/Haul Mode............................................................ 124
11
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368
Towing.........................................................111, 171, 290
Disabled Vehicle ..................................................... 290
Guide ....................................................................... 174
Recreational............................................................ 181
Weight...................................................................... 174
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 181
Traction Control............................................................ 234
Traffic Sign Recognition System ................................. 141
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ........................................... 234
Trailer Towing ............................................................... 171
Hitches .................................................................... 174
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 176
Tips .......................................................................... 180
Trailer And Tongue Weight..................................... 176
Wiring....................................................................... 179
Trailer Weight ............................................................... 174
Transfer Case ............................................................... 312
Fluid......................................................................... 355
Maintenance........................................................... 312
Transmission ................................................................ 122
Automatic .......................................................122
, 311
Fluid......................................................................... 355
Maintenance........................................................... 311
Shifting .................................................................... 121
Transporting Pets......................................................... 272
Tread Wear Indicators ................................................. 340
Turn Signals.................................................................. 112
U
Uconnect .......................................................................187
Uconnect Settings ........................................................187
Customer Programmable Features................... 27
, 29
Passive Entry Programming...............................27
, 29
Uniform Tire Quality Grades.........................................346
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
b
....... 52
Unleaded Gasoline .......................................................351
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt..................................248
USB Ports ........................................................................74
V
Vanity Mirrors.................................................................. 49
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................350
Vehicle Loading................................................... 170
, 335
Vehicle Maintenance....................................................301
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................................10
Vehicle Security Alarm....................................................23
Vehicle Settings ............................................................187
Vehicle Storage.............................................................347
Voice Command..............................................................47
Voice Recognition System (VR)...................................... 47
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard............................................275
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ..... 108
Warnings, Roll Over........................................................ 10
Warranty Information ...................................................358
Washers, Windshield ............................................61
, 300
Washing Vehicle ........................................................... 348
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................343
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.......................................... 343
Wind Buffeting ................................................................ 80
Window Fogging ............................................................. 70
Windows.......................................................................... 79
Power ......................................................................... 79
Reset Auto-Up............................................................ 80
Windshield Defroster ................................................... 272
Windshield Washers .............................................61
, 300
Fluid .........................................................................300
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................................306
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 61
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................306
Wipers, Intermittent ....................................................... 61
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 62
Wireless Charging Pad ................................................... 78
23_WS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Wagoneer vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-833-667-4825 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase
a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Third Edition V1
23_WS_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Wagoneer brand
vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google
Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Wagoneer” (U.S. residents only).
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Wagoneer is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Wagoneer est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
